PCS-921_X_Instruction Manual_EN_Overseas General_X_R1.02_(EN_FZBH5101.0086.0003).pdf

PCS-921

Breaker Failure Protection

Instruction Manual

NR Electric Co., Ltd.

Preface

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection i Date: 2013-02-21

Preface

Introduction

This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment provide

full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment.

Documentation for equipment ordered from NR is dispatched separately from manufactured goods

and may not be received at the same time. Therefore, this guide is provided to ensure that printed

information normally present on equipment is fully understood by the recipient.

Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of

this manual, and read relevant chapter carefully.

This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the equipment. Before

installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.

Health and Safety

The information in this chapter of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that

equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.

When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of

the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger

personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.

Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.

Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,

proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and

servicing. For this reason, only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.

Qualified personnel are individuals who:

Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the

system to which it is being connected;

Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety

engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to

isolate, ground, and label it;

Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering

practices;

Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

Instructions and Warnings

Preface

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection ii Date: 2013-02-21

The following indicators and standard definitions are used:

DANGER!

It means that death, severe personal injury, or considerable equipment damage will occur if safety

precautions are disregarded.

WARNING!

It means that death, severe personal, or considerable equipment damage could occur if safety

precautions are disregarded.

CAUTION!

It means that light personal injury or equipment damage may occur if safety precautions are

disregarded. This particularly applies to damage to the device and to resulting damage of the

protected equipment.

WARNING!

The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify existing features, please

make sure that the version of this manual is compatible with the product in your hand.

WARNING!

During operation of electrical equipment, certain parts of these devices are under high voltage.

Severe personal injury or significant equipment damage could result from improper behavior.

Only qualified personnel should work on this equipment or in the vicinity of this equipment. These

personnel must be familiar with all warnings and service procedures described in this manual, as

well as safety regulations.

In particular, the general facility and safety regulations for work with high-voltage equipment must

be observed. Noncompliance may result in death, injury, or significant equipment damage.

DANGER!

Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be

opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a dangerously high

voltage.

WARNING!

Exposed terminals

Do not touch the exposed terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage

Preface

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection iii Date: 2013-02-21

generated is dangerous

Residual voltage

Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply. It

takes a few seconds for the voltage to discharge.

CAUTION!

Earth

The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed

Operating environment

The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient environment detailed in the

specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.

Ratings

Before applying AC voltage and current or the DC power supply to the equipment, check that they

conform to the equipment ratings.

Printed circuit board

Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when DC power to the equipment is on, as this

may cause the equipment to malfunction.

External circuit

When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the

supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.

Connection cable

Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.

Copyright

Version: R1.02

P/N: EN_FZBH5101.0084.0003

Copyright © NR 2013. All rights reserved

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

69 Suyuan Avenue. Jiangning, Nanjing 211102, China

Tel: +86-25-87178185, Fax: +86-25-87178208

Website: www.nrelect.com, www.nari-relays.com

Email: [email protected]

We reserve all rights to this document and to the information contained herein. Improper use in particular reproduction and dissemination

to third parties is strictly forbidden except where expressly authorized.

The information in this manual is carefully checked periodically, and necessary corrections will be included in future editions. If

nevertheless any errors are detected, suggestions for correction or improvement are greatly appreciated.

We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without notice.

http://www.nrelect.com/

http://www.nari-relays.com/

Preface

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection iv Date: 2013-02-21

Documentation Structure

The manual provides a functional and technical description of this relay and a comprehensive set

of instructions for the relay’s use and application.

All contents provided by this manual are summarized as below:

1 Introduction

Briefly introduce the application, functions and features about this relay.

2 Technical Data

Introduce the technical data about this relay, such as electrical specifications, mechanical

specifications, ambient temperature and humidity range, communication port parameters, type

tests, setting ranges and accuracy limits and the certifications that our products have passed.

3 Operation Theory

Introduce a comprehensive and detailed functional description of all protective elements.

4 Supervision

Introduce the automatic self-supervision function of this relay.

5 Management

Introduce the management function (measurment, recording and remote control) of this relay.

6 Hardware

Introduce the main function carried out by each plug-in module of this relay and providing the

definition of pins of each plug-in module.

7 Settings

List settings including system settings, communication settings, label settings, logic links and etc.,

and some notes about the setting application.

8 Human Machine Interface

Introduce the hardware of the human machine interface (HMI) module and a detailed guide for the

user how to use this relay through HMI. It also lists all the information which can be view through

HMI, such as settings, measurements, all kinds of reports etc.

9 Configurable Function

Introduce configurable function of the device and all configurable signals are listed.

10 Communication

Introduce the communication port and protocol which this relay can support, IEC60970-5-103,

IEC61850 and DNP3.0 protocols are introduced in details.

11 Installation

Preface

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection v Date: 2013-02-21

Introduce the recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of this relay. A

guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of this relay is also provided, incorporating

earthing recommendations. A typical wiring connection to this relay is indicated.

12 Commissioning

Introduce how to commission this relay, comprising checks on the calibration and functionality of

this relay.

13 Maintenance

A general maintenance policy for this relay is outlined.

14 Decommissioning and Disposal

A general decommissioning and disposal policy for this relay is outlined.

15 Manual Version History

List the instruction manual version and the modification history records.

Typographic and Graphical Conventions

Deviations may be permitted in drawings and tables when the type of designator can be obviously

derived from the illustration.

The following symbols are used in drawings:

&

AND gate

≥1

OR gate

Comparator

BI Binary signal via opto-coupler

EBI Enabling binary input, an input via opto-coupler for function enabling

VEBI Virtual enabling binary signal, a signal for enabling function via

communication media by software tool

Preface

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection vi Date: 2013-02-21

SET I> Input signal from comparator with setting

EN Input signal of logic setting for function enabling

SIG Input of binary signal except those signals via opto-coupler

OTH Input of other signal

XXX Output signal

t

t

Timer

Timer (optional definite-time or inverse-time characteristic)

10ms 0ms Timer [delay pickup (10ms), delay drop off (0ms), non-settable]

[XXX] 0ms Timer (delay pickup, settable)

0ms [XXX] Timer (delay drop off, settable)

[XXX] [XXX] Timer (delay pickup, delay drop off, settable)

IDMT Timer (inverse-time characteristic)

---xxx is the symbol

Symbol Corresponding Relationship

Basic Example

A, B, C L1, L2, L3 Ia, Ib, Ic, I0 IL1, IL2, IL3, IN

AN, BN, CN L1N, L2N, L3N Ua, Ub, Uc VL1, VL2, VL3

ABC L123 Uab, Ubc, Uca VL12, VL23, VL31

U (voltage) V U0, U1, U2 VN, V1, V2

1 Introduction

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection 1-a Date: 2011-07-26

1 Introduction

Table of Contents

1.1 Application ....................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2 Function ........................................................................................................... 1-1

1.3 Features ........................................................................................................... 1-3

List of Figures

Figure 1.1-1 Function diagram of PCS-921 ............................................................................... 1-1

1 Introduction

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection 1-b Date: 2011-07-26

1 Introduction

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection 1-1 Date: 2011-07-26

1.1 Application

The PCS-921 is a digital breaker protection device and can be applied for all kinds of busbar

arrangement. By default, breaker failure protection, overcurrent protection, dead zone protection,

pole discrepancy protection and automatic reclosing function is taken as the standard function of

PCS-921.

PCS-921 supports configurable binary inputs, binary outputs, LEDs and IEC 61850 protocol.

Bus 1

5262PD 50/51G

25 79

52

52

Bus 2

PCS-921

Line 1 50BF 50/51P

Line 2

50DZ

Figure 1.1-1 Function diagram of PCS-921

No. Function ANSI

1. Breaker failure protection 50BF

2. Pole discrepancy protection 62PD

3. Two stages earth-fault protection 50/51G

4. Two stages overcurrent protection 50/51P

5. Dead zone protection 50DZ

6. Synchro-checking 25

7. Auto- reclosing 79

1.2 Function

1. Protection Function

Breaker failure protection (50BF)

Pole discrepancy protection (62PD)

Dead zone protection (50DZ)

Two stages overcurrent protection (50/51P)

1 Introduction


Two stages earth-fault protection (50/51G)

2. Logic

User programmable logic

3. Additional function

VT circuit supervision (VTS)

CT circuit supervision (CTS)

Self diagnostic

DC power supply supervision

Voltage and current drift auto regulation

Auto-reclosing (79)

Synchro-checking (25)

Event recorder including 1024 disturbance records, 1024 binary events, 1024 supervision

events and 1024 device logs.

Disturbance recorder including 64 disturbance records with waveforms (The file format of

disturbance recorder is compatible with international COMTRADE file.)

Clock synchronization

– PPS (RS-485)

– IRIG-B (RS-485)

– PPM (DIN)

– SNTP (PTP)

– IEEE1588

– SNTP (BC)

– PPS (DIN)

4. Monitoring

Number of circuit breaker operation (single-phase tripping, three-phase tripping and

reclosing)

Frequency

5. Communication

2 RS-485 communication rear ports conform to IEC 60870-5-103 protocol or DNP3.0 protocol

1 RS-485 communication rear port for clock synchronization

Up to 4 Ethernet ports (depend on the chosen type of MON plug-in module) conform to IEC

1 Introduction


61850 protocol, DNP3.0 protocol or IEC 60870-5-103 protocol over TCP/IP

Up to 2 Ethernet ports via optic fiber (ST interface or SC interface, depend on the chosen type

of MON plug-in module) conform to IEC 61850 protocol, DNP3.0 protocol or IEC 60870-5-103

protocol over TCP/IP

GOOSE communication function (optional NET-DSP plug-in module)

6. User Interface

Friendly HMI interface with LCD and 9-button keypad on the front panel.

1 front multiplex RJ45 port for testing and setting

1 RS-232 rear port for printer

Language switchover – English + selected language

Auxiliary software – PCS-Explorer

1.3 Features

The intelligent device integrated with protection, control and monitor provides powerful

protection function, flexible protection configuration, user programmable logic and

configurable binary input and binary output, which can meet with various application

requirements.

High-performance hardware platform and modularized design, MCU (management control

unit)+DSP (digital signal processor). MCU manages general fault detector element and DSP

manages protection and metering. Their data acquisition system is completely independent in

electronic circuit. DC power supply of output relay is controlled by the operation of fault

detector element operates, this prevents maloperation due to error from ADC or damage of

any apparatus.

Flexible automatic reclosure supports various initiation modes and check modes.

Multiple setting groups with password protection and setting value saved permanently before

modification.

Powerful PC tool software can fulfill protection function configuration, modify setting and

waveform analysis.

1 Introduction


2 Technical Data


2 Technical Data

Table of Contents

2.1 Electrical Specifications ................................................................................. 2-1

2.1.1 AC Current Input .................................................................................................................. 2-1

2.1.2 AC Voltage Input .................................................................................................................. 2-1

2.1.3 Power Supply ....................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.4 Binary Input .......................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.5 Binary Output ....................................................................................................................... 2-2

2.2 Mechanical Specifications ............................................................................. 2-3

2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range .................................................. 2-3

2.4 Communication Port ....................................................................................... 2-3

2.4.1 EIA-485 Port ........................................................................................................................ 2-3

2.4.2 Ethernet Port ........................................................................................................................ 2-3

2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port ................................................................................................................. 2-4

2.4.4 Print Port .............................................................................................................................. 2-4

2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port ................................................................................................. 2-4

2.5 Type Tests ........................................................................................................ 2-5

2.5.1 Environmental Tests ............................................................................................................ 2-5

2.5.2 Mechanical Tests ................................................................................................................. 2-5

2.5.3 Electrical Tests ..................................................................................................................... 2-5

2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility ............................................................................................. 2-5

2.6 Certifications ................................................................................................... 2-6

2.7 Protective Functions ....................................................................................... 2-6

2.7.1 Fault Detector ...................................................................................................................... 2-6

2.7.2 Phase Overcurrent Protection ............................................................................................. 2-7

2.7.3 Earth Fault Protection .......................................................................................................... 2-7

2.7.4 Dead Zone Protection .......................................................................................................... 2-7

2 Technical Data


2.7.5 Breaker Failure Protection ................................................................................................... 2-7

2.7.6 Pole Discrepancy Protection ............................................................................................... 2-7

2.7.7 Auto-reclosing ...................................................................................................................... 2-7

2 Technical Data


2.1 Electrical Specifications

2.1.1 AC Current Input

Phase rotation ABC

Nominal frequency (fn) 50±5Hz, 60±5Hz

Rated current (In) 1A 5A

Linear to 0.05In~40In (It should measure current without beyond full scale

against 20 times of related current and value of DC offset by 100%.)

Thermal withstand

-continuously

-for 10s

-for 1s

-for half a cycle

4In

30In

100In

250In

Burden < 0.15VA/phase @In < 0.25VA/phase @In

Number Up to 6 current input according to various applications

2.1.2 AC Voltage Input

Phase rotation ABC

Nominal frequency (fn) 50±5Hz, 60±5Hz

Rated voltage (Un) 100V~130V

Linear to 1V~170V

Thermal withstand

-continuously

-10s

-1s

200V

260V

300V

Burden at rated < 0.20VA/phase @Un

Number Up to 6 voltage input according to various applications

2.1.3 Power Supply

Standard IEC 60255-11:2008

Rated voltage 110Vdc/125Vdc, 220Vdc/250Vdc

Permissible voltage range 88~300Vdc

Permissible AC ripple voltage ≤15% of the nominal auxiliary voltage

Burden

Quiescent condition

Operating condition

<30W

<35W

2.1.4 Binary Input

Rated voltage 24V 48V

Rated current drain 1.2mA 2.4mA

Pickup voltage 13~17V 26~34V

Dropoff voltage 50% of pickup voltage

2 Technical Data


Maximum permissible voltage 100Vdc

Withstand voltage 2000Vac, 2800Vdc (continuously )

Response time for logic input ≤1ms

Number Up to 36 binary input according to various hardware configurations

Rated voltage 110V 125V 220V 250V

Rated current drain 1.1mA 1.25mA 2.2mA 2.5mA

Pickup voltage 60.5~77V 70~87.5V 121~154V

Dropoff voltage 50% of pickup voltage

Maximum permissible voltage 300Vdc

Withstand voltage 2000Vac, 2800Vdc (continuously )

Response time for logic input ≤1ms

Number Up to 36 binary input according to various hardware configurations

2.1.5 Binary Output

1. Tripping/signaling contact

Output mode Potential free contact

Continuous carry 5A@380Vac

5A@250Vdc

Pickup time <8ms (typical 5ms)

Dropoff time <5ms

Breaking capacity (L/R=40ms)

0.65A@48Vdc

0.30A@110Vdc

0.15A@220Vdc

Burden 300mW

Maximal system voltage 380Vac

250Vdc

Test voltage across open contact 1000V RMS for 1min

Short duration current

6A@3s

[email protected]

[email protected]

Number Up to 55 binary output according to various hardware configurations

2. Fast signaling contact

Output mode Potential free contact

Continuous carry 5A@380Vac

5A@250Vdc

Pickup time <1ms

Dropoff time <5ms

Breaking capacity (L/R=0ms)

1.0A@48Vdc

0.9A@110Vdc

0.4A@220Vdc

Maximal system voltage 380Vac

mailto:0.65A@48Vdc

mailto:0.30A@110Vdc

mailto:0.15A@220Vdc

mailto:[email protected]

mailto:[email protected]

mailto:1.0A@48Vdc

mailto:0.9A@110Vdc

mailto:0.4A@220Vdc

2 Technical Data


250Vdc

Test voltage across open contact 1000V RMS for 1min

2.2 Mechanical Specifications

Enclosure dimensions (W×H×D) 482.6mm×177.0mm×291.0mm

Mounting Way Flush mounted

Trepanning dimensions (W×H) 450.0mm×179.0mm, M6 screw

Chassis color Silver grey

Weight per device Approx. 15kg

Chassis material Aluminum alloy

Location of terminal Rear panel of the device

Device structure Plug-in modular type @ rear side, integrated frontplate

Protection class


Front side IP40, up to IP51 (With cover)

Other sides IP30

Rear side, connection terminals IP20

2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range


Operating temperature -40°C to +70°C (Readability of disaply may be impaired below -20°C)

Transport and storage temperature

range -40°C to +70°C

Permissible humidity 5%-95%, without condensation

Pollution degree 2

Altitude <3000m

2.4 Communication Port

2.4.1 EIA-485 Port

Baud rate 4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s

Protocol IEC 60870-5-103:1997

Maximal capacity 32

Transmission distance <500m

Safety level Isolation to ELV level

Twisted pair Screened twisted pair cable

2.4.2 Ethernet Port

Connector type RJ-45

Transmission rate 100Mbits/s

Transmission standard 100Base-TX


2 Technical Data


Protocol IEC 60870-5-103:1997, DNP 3.0 or IEC 61850


2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port

2.4.3.1 For Station Level

Characteristic Glass optical fiber

Connector type ST, SC

Fibre type Multi mode

Transmission distance <2km

Wave length 1310nm

Transmission power Min. -20.0dBm

Minimum receiving power Min. -30.0dBm

Margin Min +3.0dB

2.4.3.2 For Process Level


Connector type LC


Transmission distance <2km

Wave length 1310nm

Transmission power Min. -20.0dBm


Margin Min +3.0dB

2.4.3.3 For Synchronization Port


Connector type ST


Wave length 820nm


Margin Min +3.0dB

2.4.4 Print Port

Type RS-232

Baud Rate 4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s

Printer type EPSON® 300K printer


2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port

Type RS-485


Maximal capacity 32

2 Technical Data


Timing standard PPS, IRIG-B


2.5 Type Tests

2.5.1 Environmental Tests

Dry cold test IEC60068-2-1:2007

Dry heat test IEC60068-2-2:2007

Damp heat test, cyclic IEC60068-2-30:2005

2.5.2 Mechanical Tests

Vibration IEC 60255-21-1:1988 Class I

Shock and bump IEC 60255-21-2:1988 Class I

2.5.3 Electrical Tests


Dielectric tests Test voltage 2kV, 50Hz, 1min


Impulse voltage tests Test voltage 5kV

Overvoltage category Ⅲ

Insulation resistance

measurements Isolation resistance >100MΩ@500VDC

2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility

1MHz burst disturbance test

IEC 60255-22-1:2007

Common mode: class III 2.5kV

Differential mode: class III 1.0kV

Electrostatic discharge test

IEC60255-22-2:2008 class IV

For contact discharge: 8kV

For air discharge: 15kV

Radio frequency interference tests

IEC 60255-22-3:2007 class III

Frequency sweep

Radiated amplitude-modulated

10V/m (rms), f=80~1000MHz

Spot frequency

Radiated amplitude-modulated

10V/m (rms), f=80MHz/160MHz/450MHz/900MHz

Radiated pulse-modulated

10V/m (rms), f=900MHz

Fast transient disturbance tests

IEC 60255-22-4:2008

Power supply, I/O, Earth: class IV, 4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns

Communication terminals: class IV, 2kV, 5kHz, 5/50ns

Surge immunity test IEC 60255-22-5:2008

2 Technical Data


Power supply, AC input, I/O port: class IV, 1.2/50us

Common mode: 4kV

Differential mode: 2kV

Conducted RF Electromagnetic

Disturbance

IEC 60255-22-6:2001

Power supply, AC, I/O, Comm. Terminal: Class III, 10Vrms, 150

kHz~80MHz

Power Frequency Magnetic Field

Immunity

IEC 61000-4-8:2001

class V, 100A/m for 1min, 1000A/m for 3s

Pulse Magnetic Field Immunity IEC 61000-4-9:2001

class V, 6.4/16μs, 1000A/m for 3s

Damped oscillatory magnetic field

immunity

IEC 61000-4-10:2001

class V, 100kHz & 1MHz–100A/m

Auxiliary power supply performance

- Voltage dips

-Voltage short interruptions

IEC60255-11: 2008

Up to 500ms for dips to 40% of rated voltage without reset

100ms for interruption without rebooting

2.6 Certifications

ISO9001:2008

ISO14001:2004

OHSAS18001:2007

ISO10012:2003

CMMI L4

EMC: 2004/108/EC, EN50263:1999

Products safety(PS): 2006/95/EC, EN61010-1:2001

2.7 Protective Functions

2.7.1 Fault Detector

2.7.1.1 DPFC Current Element

Setting range 0.050In~30.000In (A)

Accuracy ≤2.5% of setting or 0.02In whichever is greater

2.7.1.2 Residual Current Element



2 Technical Data


2.7.2 Phase Overcurrent Protection



Time delay 0.000~20.000s

Accuracy ≤1% of Setting+30ms (at 2 times current setting)

2.7.3 Earth Fault Protection



Time delay 0.000~20.000 (s)


2.7.4 Dead Zone Protection

Setting range 0.050In~30.000In

Accuracy ≤2.5% or 0.02In whichever is greater

Time delay 0.000~10.000s

Accuracy ≤1% of Setting +30ms

2.7.5 Breaker Failure Protection

Pick-up time <20ms

Drop-off time <20ms

Setting range of phase current 0.050In~30.000In

Setting range of residual current 0.050In~30.000In

Setting range of negative-sequence current 0.050In~30.000In


Time delay (first) 0.000~10.000s

Time delay (second) 0.000~10.000s

2.7.6 Pole Discrepancy Protection

Setting range (residual current) 0.050In~30.000In (A)

Setting range (negative-sequence current) 0.050In~30.000In (A)

Accuracy ≤2.5% of setting 0.02In whichever is greater

Resetting ratio 95%

Time delay 0.000~600.000 (s)


2.7.7 Auto-reclosing

Phase difference setting range 0~89 (Deg)

Accuracy 2.0Deg

Voltage difference setting range 0.02Un~0.8Un (V)

(Un:Secondary rated phase-to-ground voltage)

Accuracy Max(0.01Un, 2.5%)

2 Technical Data


Frequency difference setting range 0.02~1 (Hz)

Accuracy 0.01Hz

Operating time of synchronism check ≤1%Setting+20ms

Operating time of energizing check ≤1%Setting+20ms

Operating time of auto-reclosing ≤1%Setting+20ms

3 Operation Theory


3 Operation Theory

Table of Contents

3.1 System Parameters ......................................................................................... 3-1

3.1.1 General Application ............................................................................................................. 3-1

3.1.2 Function Description ............................................................................................................ 3-1

3.1.3 Settings ................................................................................................................................ 3-1

3.2 Circuit Breaker Position Supervision ............................................................ 3-1



3.2.3 Function Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 3-2

3.2.4 I/O Signals ........................................................................................................................... 3-2

3.2.5 Logic .................................................................................................................................... 3-3

3.2.6 Settings ................................................................................................................................ 3-4

3.3 Fault Detector (FD) .......................................................................................... 3-4


3.3.2 Fault Detector in Fault Detector DSP .................................................................................. 3-4

3.3.3 Protection Fault Detector in Protection Calculation DSP .................................................... 3-6

3.3.4 Function Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 3-7

3.3.5 I/O Signals ........................................................................................................................... 3-7

3.3.6 Logic .................................................................................................................................... 3-8

3.3.7 Settings ................................................................................................................................ 3-8

3.4 Auxiliary Element ............................................................................................ 3-8



3.4.3 Function Block Diagram ..................................................................................................... 3-11

3.4.4 I/O Signals ......................................................................................................................... 3-12

3.4.5 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-14

3 Operation Theory


3.4.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-17

3.5 Phase Overcurrent Protection ..................................................................... 3-19

3.5.1 General Application ........................................................................................................... 3-19

3.5.2 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 3-19

3.5.3 Protection Principle ............................................................................................................ 3-19

3.5.4 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 3-20

3.5.5 I/O Signals ......................................................................................................................... 3-20

3.5.6 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-20

3.5.7 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-21

3.6 Earth Fault Protection ................................................................................... 3-22





3.6.5 I/O Signals ......................................................................................................................... 3-23

3.6.6 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-24

3.6.7 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-24

3.7 Dead Zone Protection ................................................................................... 3-25





3.7.5 I/O Signal ........................................................................................................................... 3-26

3.7.6 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-26

3.7.7 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-26

3.8 Breaker Failure Protection ........................................................................... 3-27




3.8.4 I/O Signals ......................................................................................................................... 3-28

3 Operation Theory

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection 3-c Date: 2013-02-27

3.8.5 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-29

3.8.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-30

3.9 Pole Discrepancy Protection ........................................................................ 3-31




3.9.4 I/O Signals ......................................................................................................................... 3-31

3.9.5 Logic .................................................................................................................................. 3-32

3.9.6 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 3-32

3.10 Synchrocheck ............................................................................................. 3-33

3.10.1 General Application ......................................................................................................... 3-33

3.10.2 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 3-33

3.10.3 I/O Signals ....................................................................................................................... 3-40

3.10.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-41

3.10.5 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-42

3.11 Automatic Reclosure................................................................................... 3-44

3.11.1 General Application .......................................................................................................... 3-44


3.11.3 Function Block Diagram ................................................................................................... 3-46

3.11.4 I/O Signals........................................................................................................................ 3-46

3.11.5 Logic ................................................................................................................................. 3-48

3.11.6 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-59

3.12 Trip Logic ..................................................................................................... 3-61

3.12.1 Application ....................................................................................................................... 3-61


3.12.3 I/O Signals ....................................................................................................................... 3-61

3.12.4 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-62

3.12.5 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-63

3.13 VT Circuit Supervision ................................................................................ 3-63

3.13.1 General Application ......................................................................................................... 3-63

3 Operation Theory

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection 3-d Date: 2013-02-27


3.13.3 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 3-64

3.13.4 I/O Signals ....................................................................................................................... 3-64

3.13.5 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-65

3.13.6 Settings ............................................................................................................................ 3-65

3.14 CT Circuit Supervision ............................................................................... 3-66

3.14.1 Application ....................................................................................................................... 3-66


3.14.3 Function Block Diagram .................................................................................................. 3-66

3.14.4 I/O Signals ....................................................................................................................... 3-66

3.14.5 Logic ................................................................................................................................ 3-67

List of Figures

Figure 3.2-1 CB position supervision........................................................................................ 3-3

Figure 3.2-2 Logic diagram of CB position supervision ......................................................... 3-3

Figure 3.3-1 Flow chart of protection program ........................................................................ 3-7

Figure 3.3-2 Logic diagram of fault detector ............................................................................ 3-8

Figure 3.4-1 Logic diagram of auxiliary element ................................................................... 3-17

Figure 3.5-1 Logic diagram of phase overcurrent protection .............................................. 3-21

Figure 3.6-1 Logic diagram of earth-fault protection ............................................................ 3-24

Figure 3.7-1 Logic diagram of dead zone protection ............................................................ 3-26

Figure 3.8-1 Logic diagram of breaker failure protection ..................................................... 3-29

Figure 3.9-1 Logic diagram of pole discrepancy protection................................................. 3-32

Figure 3.10-1 Relationship between reference voltage and synchronous voltage ............ 3-33

Figure 3.10-2 Voltage connection for single busbar arrangement ...................................... 3-35

Figure 3.10-3 Voltage connection for single busbar arrangement ...................................... 3-35

Figure 3.10-4 Voltage connection for double busbars arrangement ................................... 3-36

Figure 3.10-5 Voltage selection for double busbars arrangement ....................................... 3-36

Figure 3.10-6 Voltage connection for one and a half breakers arrangement ..................... 3-37

Figure 3.10-7 Voltage selection for one and a half breakers arrangement ......................... 3-38

3 Operation Theory

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection 3-e Date: 2013-02-27

Figure 3.10-8 Voltage selection for one and a half breakers arrangement ......................... 3-39

Figure 3.10-9 Synchronism check ........................................................................................... 3-41

Figure 3.10-10 Dead charge check logic ................................................................................. 3-42

Figure 3.10-11 Synchrocheck logic ......................................................................................... 3-42

Figure 3.11-1 Logic diagram of AR ready ............................................................................... 3-49

Figure 3.11-2 Single-phase tripping initiating AR .................................................................. 3-51

Figure 3.11-3 Three-phase tripping initiating AR ................................................................... 3-51

Figure 3.11-4 1-pole AR initiation............................................................................................. 3-52

Figure 3.11-5 3-pole AR initiation............................................................................................. 3-52

Figure 3.11-6 One-shot AR ....................................................................................................... 3-53

Figure 3.11-7 Extra time delay and blocking logic of AR ...................................................... 3-53

Figure 3.11-8 Reclosing output logic ...................................................................................... 3-54

Figure 3.11-9 Reclosing failure and success ......................................................................... 3-55

Figure 3.11-10 Single-phase transient fault ............................................................................ 3-58

Figure 3.11-11 Single-phase permanent fault ([79.N_Rcls]=2) ............................................. 3-58

Figure 3.12-1 Simplified trip logic ............................................................................................ 3-62

Figure 3.13-1 Logic diagram of VT circuit supervision ......................................................... 3-65

Figure 3.13-2 Logic diagram of VT neutral point supervision .............................................. 3-65

Figure 3.14-1 Logic diagram of CT circuit failure .................................................................. 3-67

List of Tables

Table 3.1-1 System parameters .................................................................................................. 3-1

Table 3.2-1 I/O signals of CB position supervision ................................................................. 3-2

Table 3.2-2 Internal setting of CB position supervision .......................................................... 3-4

Table 3.3-1 I/O signals of fault detector .................................................................................... 3-7

Table 3.3-2 Settings of fault detector ........................................................................................ 3-8

Table 3.4-1 I/O signals of auxiliary element ............................................................................ 3-12

Table 3.4-2 Settings of auxiliary element ................................................................................ 3-17

Table 3.5-1 I/O signals of phase overcurrent protection ....................................................... 3-20

Table 3.5-2 Settings of phase overcurrent protection ........................................................... 3-21

3 Operation Theory

PCS-921 Breaker Failure Protection 3-f Date: 2013-02-27

Table 3.6-1 I/O signals of earth fault protection ..................................................................... 3-23

Table 3.6-2 Settings of earth fault protection ......................................................................... 3-24

Table 3.7-1 I/O signals of dead zone protection ..................................................................... 3-26

Table 3.7-2 Settings of dead zone protection ......................................................................... 3-26

Table 3.8-1 I/O signals of breaker failure protection ............................................................. 3-28

Table 3.8-2 Settings of breaker failure protection ................................................................. 3-30

Table 3.9-1 I/O signals of pole discrepancy protection ......................................................... 3-31

Table 3.9-2 Settings of pole discrepancy protection ............................................................. 3-32

Table 3.10-1 I/O signals of synchrocheck ............................................................................... 3-40

Table 3.10-2 Settings of synchrocheck ................................................................................... 3-42

Table 3.11-1 I/O signals of auto-reclosing .............................................................................. 3-46

Table 3.11-2 Reclosing number ................................................................................................ 3-56

Table 3.11-3 Settings of auto-reclosing................................................................................... 3-59

Table 3.12-1 I/O signals of trip logic ........................................................................................ 3-61

Table 3.12-2 Settings of trip logic ............................................................................................ 3-63

Table 3.13-1 I/O signals of VT circuit supervision ................................................................. 3-64

Table 3.13-2 Settings of VT circuit supervision ..................................................................... 3-65

Table 3.14-1 I/O signals of CT circuit supervision ................................................................. 3-66

3 Operation Theory


3.1 System Parameters

3.1.1 General Application

The device performs various protection functions by respective algorithms with the information

(currents and voltages) acquired from primary system through current transformer and voltage

transformer, so it is important to configure analog input channels correctly.

Further to correct configuration of analog input channels, other protected system information, such

as the parameters of voltage transformer and current transformer are also required.

3.1.2 Function Description

The device generally considers transmission line as its protected object, current flows from busbar

to line is considered as the forward direction.

3.1.3 Settings

Table 3.1-1 System parameters

No. Name Range Step Unit Remark

1 Active_Grp 1~10 1 Active setting group

2 Opt_SysFreq 50 or 60 Hz System frequency

3 PrimaryEquip_Name The description of the primary equipment

4 U1n 33.00~65500.00 0.01 kV Primary rated value of VT

(phase-to-phase)

5 U2n 80.00~220.00 0.01 V Secondary rated value of VT

(phase-to-phase)

6 I1n 100~65500 1 A Primary rated value of CT

7 I2n 1 or 5 A Secondary rated value of CT

8 f_High_FreqAlm 50~65 1 Hz

Frequency upper limit setting

The device will issue an alarm

[Alm_Freq], when system frequency is

higher than the setting.

9 f_Low_FreqAlm 45~60 1 Hz

Frequency lower limit setting

The device will issue an alarm

[Alm_Freq], when system frequency is

lower than the setting.

3.2 Circuit Breaker Position Supervision


The status of circuit breaker (CB) position is applied for protection and control functions in this

device, such as, auto-reclose and VT circuit supervision, etc. The status of CB position can be

applied as input signals for other features configured by user.

3 Operation Theory



The signal reflecting CB position is acquired via opto-coupler with settable delay pick-up and

drop-off, and forms digital signal used by protection functions. CB position can reflect the status of

each phase by means of phase-segregated inputs.

In order to prevent that wrong status of CB position is input into the device via binary input,

appropriate monitor method is used to check the rationality of the binary input. When the binary

input of CB open position is detected, the status of CB position will be thought as incorrect and an

alarm [Alm_52b] will be issued if there is current detected in the line.

3.2.3 Function Block Diagram

1. For phase-segregated circuit breaker

CB Position Supervision

Alm_52bI3P

52b_PhA

52b_PhB

52b_PhC

2. For non-phase segregated circuit breaker

CB Position Supervision

Alm_52bI3P

52b

3.2.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.2-1 I/O signals of CB position supervision

No. Input Signal Description

1 I3P Three-phase current input

2 52b_PhA Normally closed contact of A-phase of circuit breaker

3 52b_PhB Normally closed contact of B-phase of circuit breaker

4 52b_PhC Normally closed contact of C-phase of circuit breaker

5 52b Normally closed contact of three-phase of circuit breaker

No. Output Signal Description

1 Alm_52b CB position is abnormal

3 Operation Theory


3.2.5 Logic

BI 52b_PhA

BI 52b_PhB

BI 52b_PhC

BI 52b

EN [En_3PhCB]

&

&

&

&

>=1

>=1

>=1

52b_A_CB

52b_B_CB

52b_C_CB

Figure 3.2-1 CB position supervision

Alm_52b

&

10s 10s

&

>=1

&

&

&

&

>=1

SIG [52b_PhC]

SIG Ia>I_Line

SIG Ib>I_Line

SIG Ic>I_Line

SIG [52b_PhB]

SIG [52b_PhA] &

&

&

Figure 3.2-2 Logic diagram of CB position supervision

Where:

1. I_Line is threshold value used to determine whether line is on-load or no-load. Default value

0.06In.

3 Operation Theory


3.2.6 Settings

Table 3.2-2 Internal setting of CB position supervision


1 En_3PhCB 0 or 1

This setting is used to determine whether CB position is

determined by phase-segregated auxiliary contact or

three-phase auxiliary contact

1: phase-segregated contact ([52b_PhA], [52b_PhB],

[52b_PhC])

0: three-phase contact ([52b])

3.3 Fault Detector (FD)


The device has one DSP module with fault detector DSP and protection DSP for fault detector and

protection calculation respectively. Protection DSP with protection fault detector element is

responsible for calculation of protection elements, and fault detector DSP is responsible to

determine fault appearance on the protected power system. Fault detector in fault detector DSP

picks up to provide positive supply to output relays. The output relays can only operate when both

the fault detector in fault detector DSP and a protection element operate simultaneously.

Otherwise, the output relays would not operate. An alarm message will be issued with blocking

outputs if a protection element operates while the fault detector does not operate.

3.3.2 Fault Detector in Fault Detector DSP

Main part of FD is DPFC current detector element that detects the change of phase-to-phase

power frequency current, and residual current fault detector element that calculates the vector

sum of 3 phase currents as supplementary. They are continuously calculating the analog input

signals.

The FD pickup condition in this device includes:

1. Pickup condition 1: DPFC current is greater than the setting value

2. Pickup condition 2: Residual current is greater than the setting value

If any of the above conditions is complied, the FD will operate to activate the output circuit

providing DC power supply to the output relays.

DPFC current fault detector element (pickup condition 1) and residual current fault detector

element (pickup condition 2) are always enabled, and all protection functions are permitted to

operate when they operate.

3.3.2.1 Fault Detector Based on DPFC Current (pickup condition 1)

DPFC phase-to-phase current is obtained by subtracting the phase-to-phase current from that of a

cycle before.

ΔI = I(k)-I(k-24)

3 Operation Theory


Where:

I(k) is the sampling value at a point.

I(k-24) is the value of a sampling point before a cycle, 24 is the sampling points in one cycle.

0 20 40 60 80 100 120-200

-100

0

100

200

Original Current

0 20 40 60 80 100 120-100

-50

0

50

100

DPFC current

From above figures, it is concluded that DPFC can reflect the sudden change of current at the

initial stage of a fault and has a perfect performance of fault detection.

It is used to determine whether this pickup condition is met according to Equation 3.3-1.

For multi-phase short-circuit fault, the DPFC phase-to-phase current has high sensitivity to ensure

the pickup of protection device. For usual single phase to earth fault, it also has sufficient

sensitivity to pick up except the earth fault with very large fault resistance. Under this condition the

DPFC current is relative small, however, residual current is also used to judge pickup condition

(pickup condition 2).

This element adopts adaptive floating threshold varied with the change of load current

continuously. The change of load current is small and steadily under normal or power swing

condition, the adaptive floating threshold with the ΔISet is higher than the change of current under

these conditions and hence maintains the element stability.

The criterion is:

ΔIΦΦMAX>1.25ΔITh+ΔISet Equation 3.3-1

Where:

ΔIΦΦMAX: The maximum half-wave integration value of phase-to-phase current (ΦΦ=AB, BC, CA)

ΔISet: The fixed threshold value (i.e. the setting [FD.DPFC.I_Set])

ΔITh: The floating threshold value

The coefficient “1.25” is an empirical value which ensures the threshold always higher than the

3 Operation Theory


unbalance output value of the system.

If operating condition is met, DPFC current element will pickup and trigger FD to provide DC power

supply for output relays, the FD operation signal will maintain 7 seconds after DPFC current

element drops off.

3.3.2.2 Fault Detector Based on Residual Current (pickup condition 2)

This pickup condition will be met when 3I0 is greater than the setting [FD.ROC.3I0_Set].

Where:

3I0: residual current calculates from the vector sum of Ia, Ib and Ic

When residual current FD element operates and lasts for longer than 10 seconds, an alarm

[Alm_PersistI0] will be issued.

If operating condition is met, the residual current FD element will pickup and trigger FD to provide

DC power supply for output relay, and pickup signal will be kept for 7 seconds after the residual

current FD element drops off.

3.3.3 Protection Fault Detector in Protection Calculation DSP

The protection device is running either of the two programs: one is “Regular program” for normal

state, and the other is “Fault calculation program” after protection fault detector picks up.

Under the normal state, the protection device will perform the following tasks:

1. Calculate analog quantity

2. Read binary input

3. Hardware self-check

4. Circuit breaker position supervision

5. Analog quantity input supervision

Once the protection fault detector element in protection calculation DSP picks up, the protection

device will switch to fault calculation program, for example the calculation of phase overcurrent

protection, and to determine logic. If the fault is within the protected zone, the protection device will

send tripping command.

The protection program flow chart is shown as Figure 3.3-1.

3 Operation Theory


Pickup?

Regular program Fault calculation program

No Yes

Main program

Sampling program

Figure 3.3-1 Flow chart of protection program

The protection FD pickup conditions are the same as the FD in fault detector DSP as shown below.

The operation criteria for the conditions are also the same as that in fault detector DSP. Please

refer to section 3.3.2 for details.

1. Pickup condition 1: DPFC current is greater than the setting value

2. Pickup condition 2: Residual current is greater than the setting value

When any pickup condition mentioned above is met, the protection device will go to fault

calculation state.


FD

FD.PkpI3P

FD.DPFC.Pkp

FD.ROC.Pkp

3.3.5 I/O Signals

Table 3.3-1 I/O signals of fault detector




1 FD.Pkp The device picks up

2 FD.DPFC.Pkp DPFC current fault detector element operates.

3 FD.ROC.Pkp Residual current fault detector element operates.

3 Operation Theory


3.3.6 Logic

OTH Ia Calculate DPFC phase-to-phase

current

△ Iab=△ (Ia-Ib)

△ Ibc=△ (Ib-Ic)

△ Ica=△ (Ic-Ia)

OTH △ Ibc>[FD.DPFC.I_Set]

OTH △ Iab>[FD.DPFC.I_Set]

OTH △ Ica>[FD.DPFC.I_Set]

Calculate residual current

3I0=Ia+Ib+IcOTH 3I0>[FD.ROC.3I0_Set]

FD.Pkp0s 7s

FD.DPFC.Pkp

FD.ROC.Pkp

>=1

>=1

OTH Ib

OTH Ic

Figure 3.3-2 Logic diagram of fault detector

3.3.7 Settings

Table 3.3-2 Settings of fault detector


1 FD.DPFC.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A Current setting of DPFC current fault

detector element

2 FD.ROC.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A Current setting of residual current fault

detector element

3.4 Auxiliary Element


Auxiliary element (AuxE) is mainly used to program logics to meet users’ applications or further

improve operating reliability of protection elements. Reliability of protective elements is assured,

auxiliary element is usually not required to configure. Auxiliary elements including current change

auxiliary element (AuxE.OCD), residual current auxiliary element (AuxE.ROC), phase current

auxiliary element (AuxE.OC), voltage change auxiliary element (AuxE.UVD), phase under voltage

auxiliary element (AuxE.UVG), phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element (AuxE.UVS) and

residual voltage auxiliary element (AuxE.ROV), and they can be enabled or disabled by

corresponding logic setting or binary inputs. Users can configure them according to applications

via PCS-Explorer software.


1. Current change auxiliary element AuxE.OCD

It shares DPFC current element of DPFC fault detector. If DPFC fault detector operates

(FD.DPFC.Pkp=1) and current change auxiliary element is enabled, current change auxiliary

element operates.

2. Residual current auxiliary element AuxE.ROC

There are 3 stages for residual current auxiliary element (AuxE.ROC1, AuxE.ROC2 and

AuxE.ROC3). Each residual current auxiliary element will operate instantly if calculated residual

current amplitude is larger than corresponding current setting

dict://key.0895DFE8DB67F9409DB285590D870EDD/amplitude

3 Operation Theory


The criteria are:

AuxE.ROC1: 3I0>[AuxE.ROC1.3I0_Set]



Where:

3I0: The calculated residual current

3. Phase current auxiliary element AuxE.OC

There are 3 stages for phase current auxiliary element (AuxE.OC1, AuxE.OC2 and AuxE.OC3).

Each phase current auxiliary element will operate instantly if phase current amplitude is larger than

corresponding current setting.

The criteria are:

AuxE.OC1: IΦMAX>[AuxE.OC1.I_Set]



Where:

IΦMAX: The maximum phase current among three phases

4. Voltage change auxiliary element AuxE.UVD

AuxE.UVD is based on phase-to-ground voltage change measured in all three phases.

The criterion is:

Δ UΦMAX>[AuxE.UVD.U_Set]

Where:

ΔUΦMAX: The maximum phase-to-ground voltage change among three phases

5. Phase under voltage auxiliary element AuxE.UVG

AuxE.UVG will operate instantly if any phase-to-ground voltage is lower than corresponding

voltage setting.

The criterion is:

UΦMIN<[ AuxE.UVG.U_Set]

Where:

UΦMIN: The minimum value among three phase-to-ground voltages

6. Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element AuxE.UVS

AuxE.UVS will operate instantly if any phase-to-phase voltage is lower than corresponding voltage

dict://key.0895DFE8DB67F9409DB285590D870EDD/amplitude

3 Operation Theory


setting.

The criterion is:

UΦΦMIN<[ AuxE.UVS.U_Set]

Where:

UΦΦMIN: The minimum value among three phase-to-phase voltages

7. Residual voltage auxiliary element AuxE.ROV

AuxE.ROV will operate instantly if calculated residual voltage is larger than corresponding voltage

setting.

The criterion is:

3U0>[ AuxE.ROV.3U0_Set]

Where:

3U0: The calculated residual voltage

3 Operation Theory



AuxE

AuxE.St

AuxE.ROCx.Blk

AuxE.OCD.En

AuxE.OCD.Blk

AuxE.ROCx.En AuxE.OCD.On

AuxE.OCD.St_Ext

AuxE.ROCx.St

AuxE.ROCx.On

AuxE.OCx.Blk

AuxE.OCx.En

AuxE.UVD.En

AuxE.UVD.Blk

AuxE.UVG.En

AuxE.UVG.Blk

AuxE.UVS.En

AuxE.UVS.Blk

AuxE.ROV.En

AuxE.ROV.Blk

AuxE.UVD.St

AuxE.UVD.St_Ext

AuxE.UVG.St

AuxE.ROV.St

AuxE.OCx.StA

AuxE.OCx.St

AuxE.OCx.On

AuxE.OCx.StB

AuxE.UVD.On

AuxE.UVG.On

AuxE.UVS.St

AuxE.UVS.On

AuxE.ROV.On

AuxE.OCx.StC

AuxE.UVG.StA

AuxE.UVG.StB

AuxE.UVG.StC

AuxE.UVS.StAB

AuxE.UVS.StBC

AuxE.UVS.StCA

Where:

x can be 1, 2 or 3

3 Operation Theory


3.4.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.4-1 I/O signals of auxiliary element


1 AuxE.OCD.En Current change auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or

programmable logic etc.

2 AuxE.OCD.Blk Current change auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or


3 AuxE.ROC1.En Stage 1 of residual current auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from

binary input or programmable logic etc.

4 AuxE.ROC1.Blk Stage 1 of residual current auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from










9 AuxE.OC1.En Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from


10 AuxE.OC1.Blk Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from










15 AuxE.UVD.En Voltage change auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or


16 AuxE.UVD.Blk Voltage change auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or


17 AuxE.UVG.En Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered

from binary input or programmable logic etc.

18 AuxE.UVG.Blk Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered


19 AuxE.UVS.En Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from


20 AuxE.UVS.Blk Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from

3 Operation Theory



21 AuxE.ROV.En Residual voltage auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from binary input

or programmable logic etc.

22 AuxE.ROV.Blk Residual voltage auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from binary input



24 U3P Three-phase voltage input


1 AuxE.St Any auxiliary element of the device operates

2 AuxE.OCD.St_Ext Current change auxiliary element operates (7s delayed drop off).

3 AuxE.OCD.On Current change auxiliary element is enabled

4 AuxE.ROC1.St Stage 1 of residual current auxiliary element operates.

5 AuxE.ROC1.On Stage 1 of residual current auxiliary element is enabled





10 AuxE.OC1.St Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates.

11 AuxE.OC1.StA Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase A).

12 AuxE.OC1.StB Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase B).

13 AuxE.OC1.StC Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element operates (phase C).

14 AuxE.OC1.On Stage 1 of phase current auxiliary element is enabled











25 AuxE.UVD.St Voltage change auxiliary element operates.

26 AuxE.UVD.St_Ext Voltage change auxiliary element operates (7s delayed drop off).

27 AuxE.UVD.On Voltage change auxiliary element is enabled

28 AuxE.UVG.St Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates.

29 AuxE.UVG.StA Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase A).

30 AuxE.UVG.StB Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase B).

31 AuxE.UVG.StC Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase C).

32 AuxE.UVG.On Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element is enabled

33 AuxE.UVS.St Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates.

34 AuxE.UVS.StAB Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase AB).

35 AuxE.UVS.StBC Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase BC).

3 Operation Theory


36 AuxE.UVS.StCA Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase CA).

37 AuxE.UVS.On Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element is enabled

38 AuxE.ROV.St Residual voltage auxiliary element operates.

39 AuxE.ROV.On Residual voltage auxiliary element is enabled

3.4.5 Logic

&

AuxE.OCD.St_Ext0s [AuxE.OCD.t_DDO]

SIG FD.DPFC.Pkp

SIG AuxE.OCD.Blk

SIG AuxE.OCD.En

En AuxE.OCD.En

&

AuxE.OCD.On

&

SIG AuxE.ROC1.En

SIG AuxE.ROC1.Blk

AuxE.ROC1.St

SIG Ia

Calculate residual

current:

3I0=Ia+Ib+Ic

SIG Ib

SIG Ic

3I0>[AuxE.ROC1.3I0_Set]

&

AuxE.ROC2.St

3I0>[AuxE.ROC2.3I0_Set]

AuxE.ROC1.OnEn AuxE.ROC1.En

&

SIG AuxE.ROC2.En

SIG AuxE.ROC2.Blk


&

&

AuxE.ROC3.St

3I0>[AuxE.ROC3.3I0_Set]SIG AuxE.ROC3.En

SIG AuxE.ROC3.Blk


&

3 Operation Theory


&

SIG AuxE.OC1.En

SIG AuxE.OC1.Blk

AuxE.OC1.St

AuxE.OC1.OnEn AuxE.OC1.En

&

SIG Ia

SIG Ib

SIG Ic

Ia>[AuxE.OC1.I_Set]

Ib>[AuxE.OC1.I_Set]

Ic>[AuxE.OC1.I_Set]

>=1

&

&

&

AuxE.OC1.StC

AuxE.OC1.StB

AuxE.OC1.StA

&

SIG AuxE.OC2.En

SIG AuxE.OC2.Blk

AuxE.OC2.St


&

SIG Ia

SIG Ib

SIG Ic

Ia>[AuxE.OC2.I_Set]

Ib>[AuxE.OC2.I_Set]

Ic>[AuxE.OC2.I_Set]

>=1

&

&

&

AuxE.OC2.StC

AuxE.OC2.StB

AuxE.OC2.StA

&

SIG AuxE.OC3.En

SIG AuxE.OC3.Blk

AuxE.OC3.St


&

SIG Ia

SIG Ib

SIG Ic

Ia>[AuxE.OC3.I_Set]

Ib>[AuxE.OC3.I_Set]

Ic>[AuxE.OC3.I_Set]

>=1

&

&

&

AuxE.OC3.StC

AuxE.OC3.StB

AuxE.OC3.StA

3 Operation Theory


SIG Ua Calculate DPFC phase

voltage

△ Ua=△ (Ua-Ufa)

△ Ub=△ (Ub-Ufb)

△ Uc=△ (Uc-Ufc)

AuxE.UVD.St_Ext0s [AuxE.UVD.t_DDO]

AuxE.UVD.St

>=1

SIG Ub

SIG Uc

ΔUa>[AuxE.UVD.U_Set]

ΔUb>[AuxE.UVD.U_Set]

ΔUc>[AuxE.UVD.U_Set]

&

SIG AuxE.UVD.En

SIG AuxE.UVD.Blk AuxE.UVD.On

En AuxE.UVD.En

&

SET UA<[AuxE.UVG.U_Set]

SET UB<[AuxE.UVG.U_Set]

SET UC<[AuxE.UVG.U_Set]

>=1

&

AuxE.UVG.St

SIG AuxE.UVG.En

SIG AuxE.UVG.Blk

En AuxE.UVG.En

&

AuxE.UVG.On

&

&

&

AuxE.UVG.StC

AuxE.UVG.StB

AuxE.UVG.StA

SET UAB<[AuxE.UVS.U_Set]

SET UBC<[AuxE.UVS.U_Set]

SET UCA<[AuxE.UVS.U_Set]

>=1

&

AuxE.UVS.St

SIG AuxE.UVS.En

SIG AuxE.UVS.Blk

En AuxE.UVS.En

&

AuxE.UVS.On

&

AuxE.UVS.StCA

&

AuxE.UVS.StBC

&

AuxE.UVS.StAB

Calculate residual voltage

3U0=Ua+Ub+Uc

AuxE.ROV.St

3U0>[AuxE.ROV.3U0_Set] &

SIG Ua

SIG Ub

SIG Uc

SIG AuxE.ROV.En

SIG AuxE.ROV.Blk

En AuxE.ROV.En

&

AuxE.ROV.On

3 Operation Theory


SIG AuxE.UVD.St_Ext

>=1

AuxE.St

SIG AuxE.UVG.St

SIG AuxE.UVS.St

SIG AuxE.ROV.St

SIG AuxE.OC1.St>=1

SIG AuxE.OC2.St

SIG AuxE.OC3.St

SIG AuxE.ROC1.St>=1

SIG AuxE.ROC2.St

SIG AuxE.ROC3.St

SIG AuxE.OCD.St_Ext

>=1

>=1

>=1

Figure 3.4-1 Logic diagram of auxiliary element

3.4.6 Settings

Table 3.4-2 Settings of auxiliary element


1 AuxE.OCD.t_DDO 0.000~10.000 0.001 s Extended time delay of current change

auxiliary element

2 AuxE.OCD.En 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling current change

auxiliary element

0: disable

1: enable

3 AuxE.ROC1.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A Current setting of stage 1 residual

current auxiliary element

4 AuxE.ROC1.En 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling stage 1 residual


0: disable

1: enable






0: disable

1: enable






0: disable

1: enable

9 AuxE.OC1.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In Current setting of stage 1 phase current

3 Operation Theory


auxiliary element

10 AuxE.OC1.En 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling stage 1 phase


0: disable

1: enable


auxiliary element




0: disable

1: enable


auxiliary element




0: disable

1: enable

15 AuxE.UVD.U_Set 0~Un 0.001 V Voltage setting for voltage change

auxiliary element

16 AuxE.UVD.t_DDO 0.000~10.000 0.001 s Extended time delay of voltage change

auxiliary element

17 AuxE.UVD.En 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling voltage change

auxiliary element

0: disable

1: enable

18 AuxE.UVG.U_Set 0~Un 0.001 V Voltage setting for phase-to-ground

under voltage auxiliary element

19 AuxE.UVG.En 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling phase-to-ground


0: disable

1: enable

20 AuxE.UVS.U_Set 0~Unn 0.001 V Voltage setting for phase-to-phase


21 AuxE.UVS.En 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling phase-to-phase


0: disable

1: enable

22 AuxE.ROV.3U0_Set 0~Un 0.001 V Voltage setting for residual voltage

auxiliary element

23 AuxE.ROV.En 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling residual voltage

auxiliary element

0: disable

1: enable

3 Operation Theory


3.5 Phase Overcurrent Protection


When a fault occurs in power system, usually the fault current would be very large and phase

overcurrent protection operates monitoring fault current is then adopted to avoid further damage to

protected equipment. For application on feeder-transformer circuits, second harmonic can also be

selected to block phase overcurrent protection to avoid the effect of inrush current on the

protection. Phase overcurrent protection is non-direction.


Phase overcurrent protection has following functions:

1. Two-stage phase overcurrent protection with independent logic, current and time delay

settings.

2. Second harmonic can be selected to block each stage of phase overcurrent protection.

3.5.3 Protection Principle

3.5.3.1 Overview

Phase overcurrent protection consists of following elements:

1. Overcurrent element: each stage is independent overcurrent element.

2. Harmonic blocking element: one harmonic blocking element shared by all overcurrent

elements and each phase overcurrent element can individually enable the output signal from

harmonic element as a blocking input.

3.5.3.2 Overcurrent Element

The operation criterion for each stage of overcurrent element is:

Ip> [50/51Px.I_Set] Equation 3.5-1

Where:

Ip is measured phase current.

[50/51Px.I_Set] is the current setting of stage x (x=1 or 2) of overcurrent element.

3.5.3.3 Harmonic Blocking Element

When phase overcurrent protection is used to protect feeder-transformer circuits, harmonic

blocking function can be selected for each stage of phase overcurrent element by configuring logic

setting [50/51Px.En_Hm2_Blk] (x=1 or 2) to prevent maloperation due to inrush current.

When the percentage of second harmonic component to fundamental component of any phase

current is greater than the setting [50/51P.K_Hm2], harmonic blocking element operates to block

stage x overcurrent element if corresponding logic setting [50/51Px.En_Hm2_Blk] is enabled.

Operation criterion:

3 Operation Theory


Ip_2nd = 50/51P.K_Hm2 × Ip Equation 3.5-2

Where:

Ip_2nd is second harmonic of phase current.

Ip is fundamental component of phase current.

[50/51P.K_Hm2] is harmonic blocking coefficient.

If fundamental component of any phase current is lower than the minimum operating current

(0.1In), then harmonic calculation is not carried out and harmonic blocking element does not

operate.


50/51Px

50/51Px.St

I3P

50/51Px.Op

50/51Px.En1

50/51Px.En2

50/51Px.Blk

50/51Px.StA

50/51Px.StB

50/51Px.StC

50/51Px.En

3.5.5 I/O Signals

Table 3.5-1 I/O signals of phase overcurrent protection



2 50/51Px.En1 Stage x of phase overcurrent protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary

input or programmable logic etc.

3 50/51Px.En2 Stage x of phase overcurrent protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary


4 50/51Px.Blk Stage x of phase overcurrent protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary



1 50/51Px.En Stage x of phase overcurrent protection is enabled

2 50/51Px.St Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts

3 50/51Px.StA Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts (A-Phase).

4 50/51Px.StB Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts (B-Phase).

5 50/51Px.StC Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts (C-Phase).

6 50/51Px.Op Stage x of phase overcurrent protection operates

3.5.6 Logic

Logic diagram of phase overcurrent is shown in the following figure, including phase overcurrent

3 Operation Theory


element and harmonic blocking element.

2nd Hm Detect &

SIG I3P

&

SET [50/51Px.En_Hm2_Blk]

&

SET Ia>[50/51Px.I_Set]

SET Ib>[50/51Px.I_Set]

SET Ic>[50/51Px.I_Set]

&

&

>=1

50/51Px.StC

50/51Px.StB

50/51Px.StA

50/51Px.En

50/51Px.t_Op 0ms 50/51Px.Op

50/51Px.St

SIG [50/51Px.En1]

SIG [50/51Px.En2]

SIG [50/51Px.Blk]

&

EN [50/51Px.En]

&

Figure 3.5-1 Logic diagram of phase overcurrent protection

Where: x=1, 2

3.5.7 Settings

Table 3.5-2 Settings of phase overcurrent protection


1. 50/51P.K_Hm2 0.000~1.000 0.001

Setting of second harmonic

component for blocking phase

overcurrent elements

2. 50/51P1.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A Current setting for stage 1 of phase

overcurrent protection

3. 50/51P1.t_Op 0.000~20.000 0.001 s Time delay for stage 1 of phase


4. 50/51P1.En 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling stage 1 of phase


0: disable

1: enable

5. 50/51P1.En_Hm2_Blk 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling second harmonic

blocking for stage 1 of phase


0: disable

1: enable

6. 50/51P2.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A Current setting for stage 2 of phase


7. 50/51P2.t_Op 0.000~20.000 0.001 s Time delay for stage 2 of phase


8. 50/51P2.En 0 or 1 Enabling/disabling stage 2 of phase


3 Operation Theory


0: disable

1: enable

9. 50/51P2.En_Hm2_Blk 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling second harmonic

blocking for stage 2 of phase


0: disable

1: enable

3.6 Earth Fault Protection


During normal operation of power system, there is trace residual current whereas a fault current

flows to earth will result in greater residual current. Therefore, residual current is adopted for the

calculation of earth fault protection. For application on feeder-transformer unit, second harmonic

also can be selected to block earth-fault protection to avoid the effect of sympathetic current on the

protection.


Earth-fault protection has following functions:

1. Two-stage earth-fault protection with independent logic, current and time delay settings.

2. Second harmonic can be selected to block each stage of earth fault protection.

3. Calculated residual current is used for the calculation of earth fault protection.


3.6.3.1 Overview

Earth fault protection consists of following two elements:

1. Overcurrent element: each stage equipped with one independent overcurrent element.

2. Harmonic blocking element: one harmonic blocking element shared by all overcurrent

elements and each overcurrent element can individually enable the output signal of harmonic

blocking element as a blocking input.

3.6.3.2 Earth Fault Element

The operation criterion for each stage of earth-fault protection is:

3I0 > [50/51Gx.3I0_Set] Equation 3.6-1

Where:

3I0 is the calculated residual current.

[50/51Gx.3I0_Set] is the current setting of stage x (x=1, 2) of earth-fault protection.

3 Operation Theory


3.6.3.3 Harmonic Blocking Element

In order to prevent effects of inrush current on earth-fault protection, harmonic blocking function

can be selected for each stage of earth-fault element by configuring logic setting

[50/51Gx.En_Hm2_Blk] (x=1, 2).

When the percentage of second harmonic component to fundamental component of residual

current is greater than the setting [50/51G.K_Hm2], harmonic blocking element operates to block

stage x of earth-fault protection if corresponding logic setting [50/51Gx.En_Hm2_Blk] is enabled

Operation criterion:

I0_2nd = 50/51G.K_Hm2 × I0 Equation 3.6-2

Where:

I0_2nd is second harmonic of residual current.

I0 is fundamental component of residual current.

[50/51G.K_Hm2] is harmonic blocking coefficient.

If fundamental component of residual current is lower than the minimum operating current (0.1In)

then harmonic calculation is not carried out and harmonic blocking element does not operate.


50/51Gx

50/51Gx.St

I3P

50/51Gx.Op

50/51Gx.En1

50/51Gx.En2

50/51Gx.Blk

50/51Gx.En

3.6.5 I/O Signals

Table 3.6-1 I/O signals of earth fault protection



2 50/51Gx.En1 Stage x of earth fault protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary input or


3 50/51Gx.En2 Stage x of earth fault protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary input or


4 50/51Gx.Blk Stage x of earth fault protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or



3 Operation Theory


1 50/51Gx.En Stage x of residual overcurrent protection is enabled.

2 50/51Gx.St Stage x of residual overcurrent protection starts.

3 50/51Gx.Op Stage x of residual overcurrent protection operates.

3.6.6 Logic

Logic diagram of earth-fault protection is shown in the following figure.

2nd Hm Detect &

SIG I3P

SET [50/51Gx.En_Hm2_Blk]

SET 3I0>[50/51Gx.3I0_Set]

&

50/51Gx.St

50/51Gx.Op 50/51Gx.t_Op 0ms

50/51Gx.En

SIG [50/51Gx.En1]

SIG [50/51Gx.En2]

SIG [50/51Gx.Blk]

EN [50/51Gx.En]&

&

Figure 3.6-1 Logic diagram of earth-fault protection

Where:

x=1, 2

3.6.7 Settings

Table 3.6-2 Settings of earth fault protection


1 50/51G.K_Hm2 0.000~1.000 0.001

Setting of second harmonic

component for blocking earth

fault elements

2 50/51G1.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A Current setting for stage 1 of

earth-fault protection

3 50/51G1.t_Op 0.000~20.000 0.001 s Time delay for stage 1 of


4 50/51G1.En 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling stage 1 of


0: disable

1: enable

5 50/51G1.En_Hm2_Blk 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling second

harmonic blocking for stage 1 of


0: disable

1: enable

6 50/51G2.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A Current setting for stage 2 of


7 50/51G2.t_Op 0.000~20.000 0.001 s Time delay for stage 2 of

3 Operation Theory



8 50/51G2.En 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling stage 2 of


0: disable

1: enable

9 50/51G2.En_Hm2_Blk 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling second

harmonic blocking for stage 2 of


0: disable

1: enable

3.7 Dead Zone Protection


Generally, fault current is very large when multi-phase fault occurs between CT and circuit breaker

(i.e. dead zone) and it will have a greater impact on the system. Breaker failure protection can

operate after a longer time delay, in order to clear the dead zone fault quickly and improve the

system stability, dead zone protection with shorter time delay (compared with breaker failure

protection) is adopted.


For some wiring arrangement (for example, circuit breaker is located between CT and the line), if

fault occurs between CT and circuit breaker, line protection can operate to trip circuit breaker

quickly, but the fault have not been cleared since local circuit breaker is tripped. Here dead zone

protection is needed in order to trip relevant circuit breaker.


The criterion for dead zone protection is: when dead zone protection is enabled, binary input of

initiating dead zone protection is energized (by default, three-phase tripping signal is used to

initiate dead zone protection), if overcurrent element for dead zone protection operates, then

corresponding circuit breaker is tripped and three phases normally closed contact of the circuit

breaker are energized, dead zone protection will operate to trip adjacent circuit breaker after a

time delay.


50DZ

50DZ.En2

50DZ.Blk

50DZ.St

50DZ.Op

50DZ.Init

50DZ.En1 50DZ.En

3 Operation Theory


3.7.5 I/O Signal

Table 3.7-1 I/O signals of dead zone protection


1 50DZ.En1 Dead zone protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary input or




3 50DZ.Blk Dead zone protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or

programmable logic etc

4 50DZ.Init Initiation signal input of the dead zone protection.


1 50DZ.En Dead zone protection is enabled.

2 50DZ.St Dead zone protection starts.

3 50DZ.Op Dead zone protection operates.

3.7.6 Logic

The logic diagram of dead zone protection is shown as below.

BI [52b_PhA]

BI [52b_PhB]

BI [52b_PhC]

[50DZ.t_Op] 0ms 50DZ.Op

50DZ.St

SIG 50DZ.En1

SIG 50DZ.En2

SIG 50DZ.Blk

EN [50DZ.En]

SIG 50DZ.Init

&

&

&

&

&

>=1

SET Ia > [50DZ.I_Set]

SET Ib > [50DZ.I_Set]

SET Ic > [50DZ.I_Set]

50DZ.En

Figure 3.7-1 Logic diagram of dead zone protection

3.7.7 Settings

Table 3.7-2 Settings of dead zone protection


1 50DZ.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A

Current setting for dead zone

protection. This setting shall ensure

the protection being sensitive

enough if dead zone fault occurs.

3 Operation Theory


2 50DZ.t_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s Time delay of dead zone

protection.

3 50DZ.En 0 or 1 -

Enabling/disabling dead zone

protection

0: disable

1: enable

3.8 Breaker Failure Protection


Duplicated protection configurations are usually adopted for EHV power system, but the primary

equipment, circuit breaker, is not duplicated. Breaker failure protection is adopted to cater circuit

breaker tripping failure.

Breaker failure protection issues a back-up trip command to trip adjacent circuit breakers in case

of a tripping failure of the circuit breaker, and clears the fault as requested by the device. To utilize

the protection information of faulty equipment and the electrical information of failure circuit

breaker to constitute the criterion of breaker failure protection, it can ensure that the adjacent

circuit breakers of failure circuit breaker are tripped with a shorter time delay, so that the affected

area is minimized, and ensure stable operation of the entire power grid to prevent generators,

transformers and other components from seriously damaged.


The instantaneous re-tripping function, after receiving tripping signal from other device and the

corresponding phase overcurrent element operating, is available and provides phase-segregated

binary output contact, which can ensure the circuit breaker is still tripped in case the secondary

circuit between the device and the circuit breaker is abnormal, to avoid undesired tripping of

breaker failure protection and the expansion of the affected area. Instantaneous re-tripping

function does not block AR.

When both the phase-segregated tripping contact from line protection and the corresponding

phase overcurrent element operate, or both the three-phase tripping contact and any phase

overcurrent element operate, breaker failure protection will send three-phase tripping command to

trip local circuit breaker after time delay of [50BF.t1_Op] and trip all adjacent circuit breakers after

time delay of [50BF.t2_Op].

When the protection element except undervoltage element within this device operates and issues

tripping signal, breaker failure protection will also be initiated.

Taking into account that the faulty current is too small for generator or transformer fault, the

sensitivity of phase current element may not meet the requirements, residual current criterion and

negative-sequence current criterion are provided in addition to the phase overcurrent element for

breaker failure protection initiated by input signal [50BF.ExTrp3P_GT] from generator and

transformer protection. They can be enabled or disabled by logic settings [50BF.En_3I0_3P] and

[50BF.En_I2_3P] respectively.

3 Operation Theory


For some special fault (for example, mechanical protection or overvoltage protection operating),

maybe faulty current is very small and current criterion of breaker failure protection is not met, in

order to make breaker failure protection can also operate under the above situation, an input

signal [50BF.ExTrp_WOI] is equipped to initiate breaker failure protection, once the input signal is

energized, normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker is chosen in addition to breaker

failure current check to trigger breaker failure timer. The device takes current as priority with CB

auxiliary contact (52b) as an option criterion for breaker failure check.


50BF

50BF.Op_ReTrpA

50BF.Op_ReTrp3P

50BF.ExTrp3P_L

50BF.ExTrp3P_GT

50BF.Op_ReTrpB

50BF.Op_ReTrpC

50BF.Op_t1

50BF.Op_t2

50BF.ExTrp_WOI

50BF.ExTrpA

50BF.ExTrpB

50BF.ExTrpC

50BF.En

50BF.Blk

50BF.En

3.8.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.8-1 I/O signals of breaker failure protection


1 50BF.ExTrp3P_L Input signal of three-phase tripping contact from line protection

2 50BF.ExTrp3P_GT Input signal of three-phase tripping contact from generator or transformer

protection

3 50BF.ExTrpA Input signal of phase-A tripping contact from external device

4 50BF.ExTrpB Input signal of phase-B tripping contact from external device

5 50BF.ExTrpC Input signal of phase-C tripping contact from external device

6 50BF.ExTrp_WOI

Input signal of three-phase tripping contact from external device. Once it is

energized, normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker is chosen in

addition to breaker failure current check to trigger breaker failure timers.

7 50BF.En Breaker failure protection enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or


8 50BF.Blk Breaker failure protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or



1 50BF.En Breaker failure protection is enabled

2 50BF.Op_ReTrpA Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-A circuit breaker

3 50BF.Op_ReTrpB Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-B circuit breaker

3 Operation Theory


4 50BF.Op_ReTrpC Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-C circuit breaker

5 50BF.Op_ReTrp3P Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip three-phase circuit breaker

6 50BF.Op_t1 Stage 1 breaker failure protection operates


3.8.5 Logic

EN [50BF.En_3I0_1P]

SET 3I0>[50BF.3I0_Set]

BI [50BF.ExTrpA]

SET IB>[50BF.I_Set]

BI [50BF.ExTrpC]

SET IC>[50BF.I_Set]

EN [50BF.En_ReTrp]

[50BF.Op_ReTrpC]

BI [50BF.ExTrp3P_GT]

[50BF.Op_ReTrpB]

[50BF.Op_ReTrpA]

EN [50BF.En_3I0_3P]

SET 3I0>[50BF.3I0_Set]

EN [50BF.En_I2_3P]

SET I2>[50BF.I2_Set]

[50BF.t1_Op] 0ms

[50BF.t2_Op] 0ms [50BF.Op_t2]

[50BF.Op_t1]

SET IA>[50BF.I_Set]

&

&

&

&

&

&

>=1

>=1

&

&

>=1

&

&

>=1

>=1

>=1

>=1

&

&

&

>=1

[50BF.Op_ReTrp3P]

&

>=1

BI [50BF.ExTrp_WOI]

&

BI [52b_PhA]

BI [52b_PhB]

BI [52b_PhC]

EN [50BF.En_CB_Ctrl]

&

>=1

[50BF.t_ReTrp] 0ms

[50BF.t_ReTrp] 0ms

[50BF.t_ReTrp] 0ms

SIG BFI_A >=1

SIG BFI_B >=1

BI [50BF.ExTrpB]

SIG BFI_C >=1

SIG BFI_3P >=1

BI [50BF.ExTrp3P_L]

&

EN [50BF.En] 50BF.On

SIG 50BF.En

SIG 50BF.Blk

SIG 50BF.On

SIG 50BF.On

Figure 3.8-1 Logic diagram of breaker failure protection

Where:

3 Operation Theory


BFI_A, BFI_B, BFI_C: Protection tripping signal of A-phase, B-phase and C-phase configured to

initiate breaker failure protection, please refer to Figure 3.12-1.

3.8.6 Settings

Table 3.8-2 Settings of breaker failure protection


1 50BF.I_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A Current setting of phase current

criterion for BFP

2 50BF.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A Current setting of zero-sequence

current criterion for BFP

3 50BF.I2_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A

Current setting of

negative-sequence current

criterion for BFP

4 50BF.t_ReTrp 0.000~10.000 0.001 s Time delay of re-tripping for BFP

5 50BF.t1_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s Time delay of stage 1 for BFP

6 50BF.t2_Op 0.000~10.000 0.001 s Time delay of stage 2 for BFP

7 50BF.En 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling breaker failure

protection

0: disable

1: enable

8 50BF.En_ReTrp 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling re-trip function

for BFP

0: disable

1: enable

9 50BF.En_3I0_1P 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling zero-sequence

current criterion for BFP initiated by

single-phase tripping contact

0: disable

1: enable

10 50BF.En_3I0_3P 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling zero-sequence

current criterion for BFP initiated by

three-phase tripping contact

0: disable

1: enable

11 50BF.En_I2_3P 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling

negative-sequence current criterion

for BFP initiated by three-phase

tripping contact

0: disable

1: enable

12 50BF.En_CB_Ctrl 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling breaker failure

protection can be initiated by

normally closed contact of circuit

breaker

0: disable

1: enable

3 Operation Theory


3.9 Pole Discrepancy Protection


The pole discrepancy of circuit breaker may occur during operation of a breaker with segregated

operating gears for the three phases. The reason could be an interruption in the tripping/closing

circuits, or mechanical failure. A pole discrepancy can only be tolerated for a limited period. When

there is loading, zero-sequence or negative-sequence current will be generated in the power

system, which will result in overheat of the generator or the motor. With the load current increasing,

overcurrent elements based on residual current or negative-sequence current may operate. Pole

discrepancy protection is required to operate before the operation of these overcurrent elements.


Pole discrepancy protection determines three-phase breaker pole discrepancy condition by its

phase segregated CB auxiliary contacts. In order to improve the reliability of pole discrepancy

protection, the asymmetrical current component can be selected as addition criteria when needed.


62PD

62PD.En1

62PD.Op

62PD.En2

62PD.Blk

62PD.In_PD

62PD.St

62PD.En

3.9.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.9-1 I/O signals of pole discrepancy protection



2 62PD.En1 Pole discrepancy protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary input or


3 62PD.En2 Pole discrepancy protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary input or


4 62PD.Blk Pole discrepancy protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or


5 62PD.In_PD Pole discrepancy binary input


1 62PD.En Pole discrepancy protection is enabled

2 62PD.St Pole discrepancy protection starts

3 62PD.Op Pole discrepancy protection operates to trip

3 Operation Theory


3.9.5 Logic

Pole discrepancy protection can be initiated following method.

Phase-segregated circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are connected to the device. When the state

of three phase-segregated circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are inconsistent, pole discrepancy

protection will be started and initiate output after a time delay [62PD.t_Op].

Pole discrepancy protection can be blocked by external input signal [62PD.Blk]. In general, this

input signal is usually from the output of 1-pole AR initiation, so as to prevent pole discrepancy

protection from operation during 1-pole AR initiation.

EN [62PD.En_3I0/I2_Ctrl]

SET 3I0>[62PD.3I0_Set]

62PD.Op

&

BI [62PD.In_PD]

BI [62PD.Blk]

SET I2>[62PD.I2_Set]

>=1

[62PD.t_Op] 0ms

SIG 62PD.En1

SIG 62PD.En2

&

>=1

62PD.St

EN [62PD.En]

&

62PD.En

Figure 3.9-1 Logic diagram of pole discrepancy protection

Where:

3I0: Calculated residual current by vector sum of Ia, Ib and Ic.

3.9.6 Settings

Table 3.9-2 Settings of pole discrepancy protection


1 62PD.3I0_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A

Current setting of residual

current criterion for pole

discrepancy protection

2 62PD.I2_Set (0.050~30.000)×In 0.001 A

Current setting of


criterion for pole discrepancy

protection

3 62PD.t_Op 0.000~600.000 0.001 s Time delay of pole


4 62PD.En 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling pole


0: disable

1: enable

5 62PD.En_3I0/I2_Ctrl 0 or 1 Enabling/disabling residual

current criterion and

3 Operation Theory



criterion for pole discrepancy

protection

0: disable

1: enable

3.10 Synchrocheck


The purpose of synchrocheck is to ensure two systems are synchronism before they are going to

be connected.

When two asynchronous systems are connected together, due to phase difference between the

two systems, larger impact will be led to the system during closing. Thus auto-reclosing and

manual closing are applied with the synchrocheck to avoid this situation and maintain the system

stability. The synchrocheck includes synchronism check and dead charge check.


The synchronism check function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and compares

them with the corresponding settings. The output is only given if all measured quantities are

simultaneously within their set limits.

The dead charge check function measures the amplitude of line voltage and bus voltage at both

sides of the circuit breaker, and then compare them with the live check setting [25.U_Lv] and the

dead check setting [25.U_Dd]. The output is only given when the measured quantities comply with

the criteria.

Synchrocheck in this device can be used for auto-reclosing and manual closing for both

single-breaker and dual-breakers. Details are described in the following sections.

When used for the synchrocheck of single-breaker, comparative relationship between reference

voltage (UL) and incoming voltage (UB) for synchronism is as follows.

ULUB

Figure 3.10-1 Relationship between reference voltage and synchronous voltage

Figure 3.10-1 shows the characteristics of synchronism check element used for the auto-reclosing

if both line and busbar are live. The synchronism check element operates if voltage difference,

3 Operation Theory


phase angle difference and frequency differency are all within their setting values.

1. The voltage difference is checked by the following equations.

[25.U_Lv]≤UB

[25.U_Lv] ≤UL

[25.U_Diff]≤|UB- UL|

2. The phase difference is checked by the following equations.

UB.UL cosØ≥0

UB.UL sin([25.phi_Diff])≥UB.UL sin([25.phi_Diff])

Where,

Ø is phase difference between UB and UL

3. The frequency difference is checked by the following equations.

|f(UB)-f(UL)|≤[25.f_Diff]

If frequency check is disabled (i.e. [25.En_fDiffChk] is set as “0”), a detected maximum slip cycle

can also be determined by the following equation based on phase difference setting and the

synchronism check time setting:

f =[25.phi_Diff]/(180×[25.t_SynChk])

Where:

f is slip cycle

If frequency check is enabled (i.e. [25.En_fDiffChk] is set as “1”), then [25.t_SynChk] can be set to

be a very small value (default value is 50ms).

3.10.2.1 Single Busbar Arrangement

Voltage selection function is not required for this busbar arrangement, the connection of the

voltage signals and respective VT MCB auxiliary contacts to the device is shown in the Figure

3.10-2 and Figure 3.10-3.

1. Three-phase bus voltage used for protection

3 Operation Theory


VTS.En_LineVT=0

CB

Line

Bus

Ua

Ub

Uc

MCB_VT_UL1

UL1

UB1

MCB_VT_UB1

Figure 3.10-2 Voltage connection for single busbar arrangement

2. Three-phase line voltage used for protection

VTS.En_LineVT=1

CB

Line

Bus

Ua

Ub

Uc

MCB_VT_UL1

UL1

UB1

MCB_VT_UB1

Figure 3.10-3 Voltage connection for single busbar arrangement

In the figures, the setting [VTS.En_LineVT] is used to determine protection voltage signals (Ua, Ub,

Uc) from line VT or bus VT according to the condition.

3 Operation Theory


3.10.2.2 Double Busbars Arrangement

Ua

Ub

Uc

MCB_VT_UL1

UB1D_Clsd

Bus2

Bus1

UB1D_Open

UB2D_Clsd

UB2D_Open

UB1

MCB_VT_UB1

UB2

MCB_VT_UB2

UL1

B1D B2D

CB

Line

Figure 3.10-4 Voltage connection for double busbars arrangement

For double busbars arrangement, selection of appropriate voltage signals from Bus 1 and Bus 2

for synchronizing are required. Line VT signal is taken as reference to check synchronizing with

the voltage after voltage selection function. Selection approach is as follows.

For the disconnector positions, the normally open (NO) and normally closed (NC) contacts of the

disconnector for bus 1 and bus 2 are required to determine the disconnector open and closed

positions. The voltage selection logic is as follows.

&

BI UB1D_Clsd

BI UB1D_Open

&

BI UB2D_Clsd

BI UB2D_Open

UB1_Sel

UB2_Sel

Invalid_Sel

Voltage

Selection Logic

&

UB1

UB2

UB

Figure 3.10-5 Voltage selection for double busbars arrangement

3 Operation Theory


After acquiring the disconnector open and closed positions of double busbars, use the following

logic to acquire the feeder voltage of double busbars.

DS2 CLOSED DS2 OPEN

DS1 CLOSED Keep original value Voltage from Bus 1 VT (UB1_Sel=1)

DS1 OPEN Voltage from Bus 2 VT (UB2_Sel=1) Keep original value

DS1 is disconnector of Bus 1

DS2 is disconnector of Bus 2

If voltage selection is invalid (Invalid_Sel=1), keep original selection and without switchover.

3.10.2.3 One and A Half Breakers Arrangement

For one and a half breakers arrangement, selection of appropriate voltage signals among Line1

VT, Line2 VT and Bus 2 VT as reference voltage to check synchronizing with Bus 1 voltage signal

for closing breaker at Bus 1 side.

Ua

Ub

Uc

UB1

MCB_VT_UL1

MCB_VT_UB1

MCB_VT_UL2

UL2

UL1

UB2

MCB_VT_UB2

UB1D_Clsd

UB1D_Open B1D

UB2D_Clsd

UB2D_Open

UL1D_Clsd

UL1D_Open

UL2D_Clsd

UL2D_Open

L2D

L1D

B2D

Bus2

Bus1

Line 1

Line 2

Figure 3.10-6 Voltage connection for one and a half breakers arrangement

3 Operation Theory


For the circuit breaker at bus side (take bus breaker of bus 1 as an example), the device acquires

the disconnector open and closed positions of two feeders and bus 2. The voltage selection logic

is as follows.

&

BI UL1D_Clsd

BI UL1D_Open

&

BI UL2D_Clsd

BI UL2D_Open

UL1_Sel

UL2_Sel

Invalid_Sel

&

&

BI UB2D_Clsd

BI UB2D_Open

UB2_Sel

&

&

UL2

UB2

ULUL1

Figure 3.10-7 Voltage selection for one and a half breakers arrangement

For the tie breaker, the device acquires the disconnector open and closed positions of two feeders

and two busbars. Either Line 1 VT or Bus 1 VT signal is selected as reference voltage to check

synchronizing with the selected voltage between Line 2 VT and Bus 2 VT. The voltage selection

logic is as follows.

3 Operation Theory


&

BI UL1D_Clsd

BI UL1D_Open

&

BI UB1D_Clsd

BI UB1D_Open

UL1_Sel

UB1_Sel

&

&

&

BI UL2D_Clsd

BI UL2D_Open

&

BI UB2D_Clsd

BI UB2D_Open

UL2_Sel

UB2_Sel

Invalid_Sel&

&

>=1

UL1

UB1

UL

UL2

UB2

UB

Figure 3.10-8 Voltage selection for one and a half breakers arrangement

When the voltage selection fails (including VT circuit failure and MCB failure), the device will issue

the corresponding failure signal. If the voltage selection is invalid (Invalid_Sel=1), keep original

selection and without switchover.

In order to simplify description, one of the two voltages used in the synchrocheck (synchronism check

and dead charge check) which obtained after voltage selection function is regarded as line voltage,

and another is bus voltage.

3.10.2.4 Synchronism Voltage Circuit Failure Supervision

If synchronism voltage from line VT or busbar VT is used for auto-reclosing with synchronism or

dead line or busbar check, the synchronism voltage is monitored.

If the circuit breaker is in closed state (52b of three phases are de-energized), but the synchronism

voltage is lower than the setting [25.U_Lv], it means that synchronism voltage circuit fails and an

alarm [25.Alm_VTS_UB] or [25.Alm_VTS_UL] will be issued with a time delay of 10s.

If auto-reclosing is disabled, or the logic setting [25.En_NoChk] is set as “1”, synchronism voltage

is not required and synchronism voltage circuit failure supervision will be disabled.

When synchronism voltage circuit failure is detected, function of synchronism check and dead

check in auto-reclosing logic will be disabled.

3 Operation Theory


After synchronism voltage reverted to normal condition, the alarm will be reset automatically with a

time delay of 10s.

3.10.3 I/O Signals

Table 3.10-1 I/O signals of synchrocheck


1 25.Blk_Chk Input signal of blocking synchrocheck function for AR.

2 25.Blk_SynChk Input signal of blocking synchronism check for AR. If the value is “1”, the output of

synchronism check is “0”.

3 25.Blk_DdChk Input signal of blocking dead charge check for AR.

4 25.Start_Chk Input signal of starting synchronism check, usually it was starting signal of AR

from auto-reclosing module.

5 25.Blk_VTS_UB VT circuit supervision (UB) is blocked

6 25.Blk_VTS_UL VT circuit supervision (UL) is blocked

7 25.MCB_VT_UB Binary input for VT MCB auxiliary contact (UB)

8 25.MCB_VT_UL Binary input for VT MCB auxiliary contact (UL)


1 UL1_Sel To select voltage of Line 1


3 UB1_Sel To select voltage of Bus 1


5 Invalid_Sel Voltage selection is invalid.

6 25.Ok_fDiffChk To indicate that frequency difference condition for synchronism check of AR is

met, frequency difference between UB and UL is smaller than [25.f_Diff].

7 25.Ok_UDiffChk To indicate that voltage difference condition for synchronism check of AR is met,

voltage difference between UB and UL is smaller than [25.U_Diff]

8 25.Ok_phiDiffChk To indicate phase difference condition for synchronism check of AR is met, phase

difference between UB and UL is smaller than [25.phi_Diff].

9 25.Ok_DdL_DdB Dead line and dead bus condition is met

10 25.Ok_DdL_LvB Dead line and live bus condition is met

11 25.Ok_LvL_DdB Live line and dead bus condition is met

12 25.Chk_LvL Line voltage is greater than the voltage setting [25.U_Lv]

13 25.Chk_DdL Line voltage is smaller than the voltage setting [25.U_Dd]

14 25.Chk_LvB Bus voltage is greater than the voltage setting [25.U_Lv]

15 25.Chk_DdB Bus voltage is smaller than the voltage setting [25.U_Dd]

16 25.Ok_DdChk To indicate that dead charge check condition of AR is met

17 25.Ok_SynChk To indicate that synchronism check condition of AR is met

18 25.Ok_Chk To indicate that synchrocheck condition of AR is met

19 25.Alm_VTS_UB Synchronism voltage circuit is abnormal (UB)

20 25.Alm_VTS_UL Synchronism voltage circuit is abnormal (UL)

21 f_Prot Frequency of the voltage used by protection calculation

22 f_Syn Frequency of the voltage used by synchrocheck

3 Operation Theory


23 u_Diff Voltage difference for synchronism check

24 f_Diff Frequency difference for synchronism check

25 phi_Diff Phase difference for synchronism check

3.10.4 Logic

These logic diagrams give the introduction to the working principles of the synchronism check and

dead charge check.

3.10.4.1 Synchronism Check Logic

The frequency difference, voltage difference, and phase difference of voltages from both sides of

the circuit breaker are calculated in the device, they are used as input conditions of the

synchronism check.

When the synchronism check function is enabled and the voltages of both ends meets the

requirements of the voltage difference, phase difference, and frequency difference, and there is no

synchronism check blocking signal, it is regarded that the synchronism check conditions are met.

EN [25.En_SynChk]

SIG UB>[25.U_Lv]

SIG 25.Ok_UDiffChk

SIG 25.Ok_phiDiffChk

SIG 25.Ok_fDiffChk

&

50ms 0ms &

&

[25.t_SynChk] 0ms 25.Ok_SynChkSIG UL>[25.U_Lv]

SIG 25.Blk_Chk >=1

SIG 25.Blk_SynChk

SIG 25.Start_Chk

&

Figure 3.10-9 Synchronism check

3.10.4.2 Dead Charge Check Logic

The dead charge check conditions have three types, namely, live-bus and dead-line check,

dead-bus and live-line check and dead-bus and dead-line check. The above three modes can be

enabled and disabled by the corresponding logic settings. The device can calculate the measured

bus voltage and line voltage at both sides of the circuit breaker and compare them with the

settings [25.U_Lv] and [25.U_Dd]. When the voltage is higher than [25.U_Lv], the bus/line is

regarded as live. When the voltage is lower than [25.U_Dd], the bus/line is regarded as dead.

3 Operation Theory


EN [25.En_DdL_DdB]

EN [25.En_DdL_LvB]

EN [25.En_LvL_DdB]

SIG UL>[25.U_Lv]

SIG UL<[25.U_Dd]

SIG UB>[25.U_Lv]

SIG UB<[25.U_Dd]

SIG 25.Alm_VTS_UB

[25.t_DdChk] 0ms 25.Ok_DdChk

&

SIG 25.Blk_Chk >=1

SIG 25.Blk_DdChk

SIG 25.Start_Chk

SIG 25.Alm_VTS_UL

>=1

>=1

25.Ok_DdL_DdB

25.Ok_DdL_LvB

25.Ok_LvL_DdB

&

&

&

&

Figure 3.10-10 Dead charge check logic

3.10.4.3 Synchrocheck Logic

SIG 25.Ok_SynChk>=1

SIG 25.Ok_DdChk

25.Ok_Chk EN 25.En_NoChk

Figure 3.10-11 Synchrocheck logic

This device comprises two synchrocheck modules, correspond to circuit breaker 1 and circuit

breaker 2 respectively.

3.10.5 Settings

Table 3.10-2 Settings of synchrocheck


1 25.Opt_Source_UL 0~5 1

Voltage selecting mode of line.

0: A-phase voltage

1: B-phase voltage

2: C-phase voltage

3: AB-phase voltage

3 Operation Theory


4: BC-phase voltage

5: CA-phase voltage

2 25.Opt_Source_UB 0~5 1

Voltage selecting mode of bus.

0: A-phase voltage

1: B-phase voltage

2: C-phase voltage

3: AB-phase voltage

4: BC-phase voltage

5: CA-phase voltage

3 25.U_Dd 0.05Un~0.8Un 0.001 V Voltage threshold of dead check

4 25.U_Lv 0.5Un~Un 0.001 V Voltage threshold of live check

5 25.K_Usyn 0.20-5.00 Compensation coefficient for

synchronous voltage

6 25.phi_Diff 0~ 89 1 Deg Phase difference limit of

synchronism check for AR

7 25.phi_Comp 0~359 1 Deg

Compensation for phase

difference between two

synchronous voltages

8 25.f_Diff 0.02~1.00 0.01 Hz Frequency difference limit of


9 25.U_Diff 0.02Un~0.8Un V Voltage difference limit of


10 25.t_DeadChk 0.010~25.000 s Time delay to confirm dead check

condition

11 25.t_SynChk 0.010~25.000 s Time delay to confirm

synchronism check condition

12 25.En_fDiffChk 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling frequency

difference check

0: disable

1: enable

13 25.En_SynChk 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling synchronism

check

0: disable

1: enable

14 25.En_DdL_DdB 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling dead line and

dead bus (DLDB) check

0: disable

1: enable

15 25.En_DdL_LvB 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling dead line and

live bus (DLLB) check

0: disable

1: enable

16 25.En_LvL_DdB 0 or 1 Enabling/disabling live line and

3 Operation Theory


dead bus (LLDB) check

0: disable

1: enable

17 25.En_NoChk 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling AR without any

check

0: disable

1: enable

3.11 Automatic Reclosure


To maintain the integrity of the overall electrical transmission system, the device is installed on the

transmission system to isolate faulted segments during system disturbances. Faults caused by

lightning, wind, or tree branches could be transient in nature and may disappear once the circuit is

de-energized. According to statistics, for overhead transmission line, 80%~90% of the faults on

overhead lines are the transient faults. Auto-reclosing systems are installed to restore the faulted

section of the transmission system once the fault is extinguished (providing it is a transient fault).

For certain transmission systems, auto-reclosure is used to improve system stability by restoring

critical transmission paths as soon as possible.

Besides overhead lines, other equipment failure, such as cables, busbar, transformer fault and so

on, are generally permanent fault, and auto-reclosing is not initiated after faulty feeder is tripped.

For some mixed circuits, such as overhead line with a transformer unit, hybrid transmission lines,

etc., it is required to ensure that auto-reclosing is only initiated for faults overhead line section, or

make a choice according to the situation.


This auto-reclosing logic can be used with either integrated device or external device. When the

auto-reclosure is used with integrated device, the internal protection logic can initiate AR,

moreover, a tripping contact from external device can be connected to the device via opto-coupler

input to initiate integrated AR function.

When external auto-reclosure is used, the device can output some configurable output to initiate

external AR, such as, contact of initiating AR, phase-segregated tripping contact, single-phase

tripping contact, three-phase tripping contact and contact of blocking AR. According to

requirement, these contacts can be selectively connected to external auto-reclosure device to

initiate AR.

For phase-segregated circuit breaker, AR mode can be 1-pole AR for single-phase fault and

3-pole AR for multi-phase fault, or always 3-pole AR for any kinds of fault according to system

requirement. For persistent fault or multi-shot AR number preset value is reached, the device will

send final tripping command. The device will provide appropriate tripping command based on

faulty phase selection if adopting 1-pole AR.

AR can be enabled or disabled by logic setting or external signal via binary input. When AR is

enabled, the device will output contact [79.On], otherwise, output contact [79.Off]. After some

3 Operation Theory


reclosing conditions, such as, CB position, CB pressure and so on, is satisfied, the device will

output contact [79.Ready].

According to requirement, the device can be set as one-shot or multi-shot AR. When adopting

multi-shot AR, the AR mode of first time reclosing can be set as 1-pole AR, 3-pole AR or 1/3-pole

AR. The rest AR mode is only 3-pole AR and its number is determined by the maximum 3-pole

reclosing number.

For one-shot AR or first reclosing of multi-shot AR, AR mode can be selected by logic setting

[79.En_1PAR], [79.En_3PAR] and [79.En_1P/3PAR] or external signal via binary inputs. When

3-pole or 1/3-pole AR mode is selected, the following three types of check modes can be selected:

dead charge check, synchronism check and no check.

3 Operation Theory



79

79.En 79.On

79.Blk 79.Off

79.Ready

79.AR_Blkd

79.Active

79.Inprog

79.Inprog_1P

79.Inprog_3PS2

79.WaitToSlave

79.Fail_Rcls

79.Fail_Chk

79.Mode_1PAR

79.Mode_3PAR

79.Mode_1/3PAR

79.Sel_1PAR

79.Sel_3PAR

79.Sel_1P/3PAR

79.Trp

79.Trp3P

79.TrpA

79.TrpB

79.TrpC

79.Lockout

79.PLC_Lost

79.WaitMaster

79.CB_Healthy

79.Clr_Counter

79.Ok_Chk

79.Succ_Rcls

79.Prem_Trp1P

79.Prem_Trp3P

79.Inprog_3P

79.Inprog_3PS1

79.Inprog_3PS3

79.Inprog_3PS4

79.Close

79.Rcls_Status

3.11.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.11-1 I/O signals of auto-reclosing


1 79.En Binary input for enabling AR. If the logic setting [79.En_ExtCtrl]=1,

enabling AR will be controlled by the external signal via binary input

2 79.Blk Binary input for disabling AR. If the logic setting [79.En_ExtCtrl]=1,

disabling AR will be controlled by the external input

3 79.Sel_1PAR Input signal for selecting 1-pole AR mode of corresponding circuit

3 Operation Theory


breaker

4 79.Sel_3PAR Input signal for selecting 3-pole AR mode of corresponding circuit

breaker

5 79.Sel_1P/3PAR Input signal for selecting 1/3-pole AR mode of corresponding circuit

breaker

6 79.Trp Input signal of single-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR

7 79.Trp3P Input signal of three-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR

8 79.TrpA Input signal of A-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR

9 79.TrpB Input signal of B-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR

10 79.TrpC Input signal of C-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR

11 79.LockOut

Input signal of blocking reclosing, usually it is connected with the

operating signals of definite-time protection, transformer protection

and busbar differential protection, etc.

12 79.PLC_Lost Input signal of indicating the alarm signal that signal channel is lost

13 79.WaitMaster Input signal of waiting for reclosing permissive signal from master

AR (when reclosing multiple circuit breakers)

14 79.CB_Healthy The input for indicating whether circuit breaker has enough energy to

perform the close function

15 79.Clr_Counter Clear the reclosing counter

16 79.Ok_Chk Synchrocheck condition of AR is met


1 79.On Automatic reclosure is enabled

2 79.Off Automatic reclosure is disabled

3 79.Close Output of auto-reclosing signal

4 79.Ready Automatic reclosure have been ready for reclosing cycle

5 79.AR_Blkd Automatic reclosure is blocked

6 79.Active Automatic reclosing logic is actived

7 79.Inprog Automatic reclosing cycle is in progress

8 79.Inprog_1P The first 1-pole AR cycle is in progress

9 79.Inprog_3P 3-pole AR cycle is in progress

10 79.Inprog_3PS1 First 3-pole AR cycle is in progress

11 79.Inprog_3PS2 Second 3-pole AR cycle is in progress

12 79.Inprog_3PS3 Third 3-pole AR cycle is in progress

13 79.Inprog_3PS4 Fourth 3-pole AR cycle is in progress

14 79.WaitToSlave Waiting signal of automatic reclosing which will be sent to slave

(when reclosing multiple circuit breakers)

15 79.Prem_Trp1P Single-phase circuit breaker will be tripped once protection device

operates

16 79.Prem_Trp3P Three-phase circuit breaker will be tripped once protection device

operates

17 79.Rcls_Status Automatic reclosure status (0: AR is ready; 1: AR is in progress; 2:

AR is successful)

18 79.Fail_Rcls Auto-reclosing fails

3 Operation Theory


19 79.Succ_Rcls Auto-reclosing is successful

20 79.Fail_Chk Synchrocheck for AR fails

21 79.Mode_1PAR Output of 1-pole AR mode


23 79.Mode_1/3PAR Output of 1/3-pole AR mode

Automatic reclosure counter

24 79.N_Total_Rcls Total Recorded number of all reclosing attempts

25 79.N_Total_Rcls 1-pole Shot 1 Recorded number of first 1-pole reclosing attempts

26 79.N_Total_Rcls 3-pole Shot 1 Recorded number of first 3-pole reclosing attempts

27 79.N_Total_Rcls 3-pole Shot 2 Recorded number of second 3-pole reclosing attempts

28 79.N_Total_Rcls 3-pole Shot 3 Recorded number of third 3-pole reclosing attempts

29 79.N_Total_Rcls 3-pole Shot 4 Recorded number of fourth 3-pole reclosing attempts

3.11.5 Logic

3.11.5.1 AR Ready

For the first reclosing of multi-shot AR, AR mode can be 1-pole AR or 3-pole AR, however, the

selection is valid only to the first reclosing, after that it can only be 3-pole AR.

When logic setting [79.SetOpt] is set as “1”, AR mode is determined by logic settings. When logic

setting [79.SetOpt] is set as “0”, AR mode is determined by external signal via binary inputs.

An auto-reclosure must be ready to operate before performing reclosing. The output signal

[79.Ready] means that the auto-reclosure can perform at least one time of reclosing function, i.e.,

breaker open-close-open.

When the device is energized or after the settings are modified, the following conditions must be

met before the reclaim time begins:

1. AR function is enabled.

2. The circuit breaker is ready, such as, normal storage energy and no low pressure signal.

3. The duration of the circuit breaker in closed position before fault occurrence is not less than

the setting [79.t_CBClsd].

4. There is no block signal of auto-reclosing.

After the auto-reclosure operates, the auto-reclosure must reset, i.e., [79.Active]=0, in addition to

the above conditions for reclosing again.

The logic of AR ready is shown in Figure 3.11-1.

When there is a fault on an overhead line, the concerned circuit breakers will be tripped normally.

After fault is cleared, the tripping command will drop off immediately. In case the circuit breaker is

in failure, etc., and the tripping signal of the circuit breaker maintains and in excess of the time

delay [79.t_PersistTrp], AR will be blocked, as shown in the following figure.

3 Operation Theory


79.AR_Blkd

SIG 1-pole AR Initiation [79.t_SecFault] 0ms

En [79.En_PDF_Blk]

&

SIG Any tripping signal

SIG 79.LockOut

SIG Any tripping signal [79.t_PersistTrp] 0ms

SIG 79.Sel_1PAR &

SIG Phase A open &

SIG Phase B open

SIG Phase C open

&

>=1

&

&

En [79.N_Rcls]=1

>=1

0ms [79.t_DDO_BlkAR]

SIG Three phase trip

>=1

[79.t_CBClsd] 100msSIG CB closed position


SIG 79.Active

BI [79.CB_Healthy]

>=1

>=1

&

79.Ready

EN [79.En]

0ms [79.t_CBReady]

EN [79.En_ExtCtrl]

&

>=1

79.On

&

79.EnSIG &

79.BlkSIG

&

&

&

>=1

SIG 79.AR_Blkd

SIG Last shot is made

>=1

SIG 79.Fail_Rcls

>=1

SIG 79.Fail_Chk

SIG BlockAR

Figure 3.11-1 Logic diagram of AR ready

The input signal [79.CB_Healthy] must be energized before auto-reclosure gets ready. Because

most circuit breakers can finish one complete process: open-closed-open, it is necessary that

circuit breaker has enough energy before reclosing. When the time delay of AR is exhausted, AR

3 Operation Theory


will be blocked if the input signal [79.CB_Healthy] is still not energized within time delay

[79.t_CBReady]. If this function is not required, the input signal [79.CB_Healthy] can be not to

configure, and its state will be thought as “1” by default.

When auto-reclosure is blocked, auto-reclosing failure, synchrocheck failure or last shot is

reached, or when the internal blocking condition of AR is met (such as, zone 3 of distance

protection operates, the device operates for multi-phase fault, three-phase fault and so on. These

flags of blocking AR have been configured in the device, additional configuration is not required.),

auto-reclosure will be discharged immediately and next auto-reclosing will be disabled.

When the input signal [79.LockOut] is energized, auto-reclosure will be blocked immediately. The

blocking flag of AR will be also controlled by the internal blocking condition of AR. When the

blocking flag of AR is valid, auto-reclosure will be blocked immediately.

When a fault occurs under pole disagreement condition, blocking AR can be enabled or disabled.

The time delay [79.t_SecFault] is used to discriminate another fault which begins after 1-pole AR

initiated. AR will be blocked if another fault happens after this time delay if the logic setting

[79.En_PDF_Blk] is set as “1”, and 3-pole AR will be initiated if [79.En_PDF_Blk] is set as “1”.

AR will be blocked immediately once the blocking condition of AR appears, but the blocking

condition of AR will drop off with a time delay [79.t_DDO_BlkAR] after blocking signal disappears.

When one-shot and 1-pole AR is enabled, auto-reclosure will be blocked immediately if there are

binary inputs of multi-phase CB position is energized.

When any protection element operates to trip, the device will output a signal [79.Active] until AR

drop off (Reset Command). Any tripping signal can be from external protection device or internal

protection element.

AR function can be enabled by internal logic settings of AR mode or external signal via binary

inputs in addition to internal logic setting [79.En]. When logic setting [79.En_ExtCtrl] is set as “1”,

AR enable are determined by external signal via binary inputs and logic settings. When logic

setting [79.En_ExtCtrl] set as “0”, AR enable are determined only by logic settings.

For one-shot reclosing, if 1-pole AR mode is selected, auto-reclosure will reset when there is

three-phase tripping signal or input signal of multi-phase open position.

3.11.5.2 AR Initiation

AR mode can be selected by external signal via binary inputs or internal logic settings. If the logic

setting [79.SetOpt] set as “1”, AR mode is determined by the internal logic settings. If the logic

settings [79.SetOpt] set as “0”, AR mode is determined by the external inputs.

1. AR initiated by tripping signal of line protection

AR can be initiated by tripping signal of line protection, and the tripping signal may be from internal

trip signal or external trip signal.

When selecting 1-pole AR or 1/3-pole AR, line single-phase fault will trigger 1-pole AR. When AR

is ready to reclosing (“79.Ready”=1) and the single-phase tripping command is received, this

single-phase tripping command will be kept in the device, and 1-pole AR will be initiated after the

3 Operation Theory


single-phase tripping command drops off. The single-phase tripping command kept in the device

will be cleared after the completion of auto-reclosing sequence (Reset Command). Its logic is

shown in Figure 3.11-2.

SIG Reset Command

SIG Single-phase Trip

SIG 79.Ready

&

>=1

1-pole AR Initiation

SIG 79.Sel_1PAR

SIG 79.Sel_1P/3PAR

>=1

&

&

Figure 3.11-2 Single-phase tripping initiating AR

When selecting 3-pole AR or 1/3-pole AR, three-phase tripping will trigger 3-pole AR. When AR is

ready to reclosing (“79.Ready”=1) and the three-phase tripping command is received, this

three-phase tripping command will be kept in the device, and 3-pole AR will be initiated after the

three-phase tripping command drops off. The three-phase tripping command kept in the device will

be cleared after the completion of auto-reclosing sequence. (Reset Command) Its logic is shown

in Figure 3.11-3.

SIG Reset Command

SIG Three-phase Trip

SIG 79.Ready

SIG 79.Sel_3PAR

SIG 79.Sel_1P/3PAR

&

>=1

>=1


&

&

Figure 3.11-3 Three-phase tripping initiating AR

2. AR initiated by CB state

A logic setting [79.En_CBInit] is available for selection that AR is initiated by CB state. Under

normal conditions, when AR is ready to reclosing (“79.Ready”=1), AR will be initiated if circuit

breaker is open and corresponding phase current is nil. AR initiated by CB state can be divided

into initiating 1-pole AR and 3-pole AR, their logics are shown in Figure 3.11-4 and Figure 3.11-5

respectively. Usually normally closed contact of circuit breaker is used to reflect CB state.

3 Operation Theory


SIG Phase A open

SIG 79.Ready

>=1

&

SIG Phase B open

SIG Phase C open

&

EN [79.En_CBInit]


SIG 79.Sel_1PAR

SIG 79.Sel_1P/3PAR

>=1

&

&

Figure 3.11-4 1-pole AR initiation

SIG Phase A open

EN [79.Sel_1PAR]

SIG 79.Ready

EN [79.Sel_1P/3PAR]

&

>=1

&


SIG Phase B open

SIG Phase C open

EN [79.En_CBInit] &

Figure 3.11-5 3-pole AR initiation

3.11.5.3 AR Reclosing

After AR is initiated, the device will output the initiating contact of AR. For 1-pole AR, in order to

prevent pole discrepancy protection from maloperation under pole discrepancy conditions, the

contact of “1-pole AR initiation” can be used to block pole discrepancy protection.

When the dead time delay of AR expires after AR is initiated, as for 1-pole AR, the result of

synchronism check will not be judged, and reclosing command will be output directly. As far as the

3-pole AR, if the synchronism check is enabled, the release of reclosing command shall be subject

to the result of synchronism check. After the dead time delay of AR expires, if the synchronism

check is still unsuccessful within the time delay [79.t_wait_Chk], the signal of synchronism check

failure (79.Fail_Syn) will be output and the AR will be blocked. If 3-pole AR with no-check is

enabled, the condition of synchronism check success (25.Ok_Chk) will always be established.

And the signal of synchronism check success (25.Ok_Chk) from the synchronism check logic can

be applied by auto-reclosing function inside the device or external auto-reclosure device.

3 Operation Theory


SIG 3-pole AR Initiation

SIG 25.Ok_Chk

[79.t_Dd_1PS1] 0ms

[79.t_Dd_3PS1] 0ms AR Pulse

[79.t_Wait_Chk] 0ms 79.Fail_Chk

79.Inprog

>=1

>=1

&

&

SIG 1-pole AR Initiation

79.Inprog_3P

79.Inprog_1P

Figure 3.11-6 One-shot AR

In case pilot protection adopting permissive scheme, when the communication channel is

abnormal, pilot protection will be disabled. In the process of channel abnormality, an internal fault

occurs on the transmission line, backup protection at both ends of line will operate to trip the circuit

breaker of each end. The operation time of backup protection at both ends of the line is possibly

non-accordant, whilst the time delay of AR needs to consider the arc-extinguishing and insulation

recovery ability for transient fault, so the time delay of AR shall be considered comprehensively

according to the operation time of the device at both ends. When the communication channel of

main protection is abnormal (input signal [79.PLC_Lost] is energized), and the logic setting

[79.En_AddDly] is set as “1”, then the dead time delay of AR shall be equal to the original dead

time delay of AR plus the extra time delay [79.t_AddDly], so as to ensure the recovery of insulation

intensity of fault point when reclosing after transient fault. This extra time delay [t_ExtendDly] is

only valid for the first shot AR.


BI [79.PLC_Lost]

EN [79.En_AddDly]

SIG 79.Active

&

>=1

&

&

Extend AR time

Figure 3.11-7 Extra time delay and blocking logic of AR

Reclosing pulse length may be set through the setting [79.t_DDO_AR]. For the circuit breaker

without anti-pump interlock, a logic setting [79.En_CutPulse] is available to control the reclosing

pulse. When this function is enabled, if the device operates to trip during reclosing, the reclosing

pulse will drop off immediately, so as to prevent multi-shot reclosing onto fault. After the reclosing

command is issued, AR will drop off with time delay [79.t_Reclaim], and can carry out next

reclosing.

3 Operation Theory


&

[79.t_PW_AR]

SIG AR Pulse

79.AR_Out

EN [79.En_CutPulse]

SIG Single-phase Trip

SIG Three-phase Trip

0ms 50ms

>=1

&

>=1

[79.t_Reclaim] 0ms Reset Command

Figure 3.11-8 Reclosing output logic

The reclaim timer defines a time from the issue of the reclosing command, after which the

reclosing function resets. Should a new trip occur during this time, it is treated as a continuation of

the first fault. The reclaim timer is started when the CB closing command is given.

3.11.5.4 Reclosing Failure and Success

For transient fault, the fault will be cleared after the device operates to trip. After the reclosing

command is issued, AR will drop off after time delay [79.t_Reclaim], and can carry out next

reclosing. When the reclosing is unsuccessful or the reclosing condition is not met after AR

initiated, the reclosing will be considered as unsuccessful, including the following cases.

1. For one-shot AR, if the tripping command is received again within reclaim time after the

reclosing pulse is issued, the reclosing shall be considered as unsuccessful.

2. For multi-shot AR, if the reclosing times are equal to the setting value of AR number and the

tripping command is received again after the last reclosing pulse is issued, the reclosing shall

be considered as unsuccessful.

3. The logic setting [79.En_FailCheck] is available to judge whether the reclosing is successful

by CB state, when it is set as “1”. If CB is still in open position with a time delay [79.t_Fail] after

the reclosing pulse is issued, the reclosing shall be considered as unsuccessful. For this case,

the device will issue a signal (79.Fail_Rcls) to indicate that the reclosing is unsuccessful, and

this signal will drop off after (Reset Command). AR will be blocked if the reclosing shall be

considered as unsuccessful.

3 Operation Theory


SIG AR Pulse

SIG CB closed

EN [79.En_FailCheck]

SIG Last shot is made

79.Fail_Rcls

[79.t_Fail] 0ms

SIG Any tripping command &

>=1

&

&

>=1

0ms 200ms

0 [79.t_Fail] &

&

79.Succ_Rcls

SIG 79.AR_Blkd

SIG 79.Inprog &

>=1

Figure 3.11-9 Reclosing failure and success

After unsuccessful AR is confirmed, AR will be blocked. AR will not enter into the ready state

unless the circuit breaker position drops off , and can only begin to enter into the ready state again

after the circuit breaker is closed.

3.11.5.5 Reclosing Numbers Control

The device may be set up into one-shot or multi-shot AR. Through the setting [79.N_Rcls], the

maximum number of reclosing attempts may be set up to 4 times. Generally, only one-shot AR is

selected. Some corresponding settings may be hidden if one-shot AR is selected.

1. 1-pole AR

[79.N_Rcls]=1 means one-shot reclosing. For one-shot 1-pole AR mode, 1-pole AR will be initiated

only for single-phase fault and respective faulty phase selected, otherwise, AR will be blocked. For

single-phase transient fault on the line, line protection device will operate to trip and 1-pole AR is

initiated. After the dead time delay for 1-pole AR is expired, the device will send reclosing pulse,

and then the auto-reclosure will drop off after the time delay [79.t_Reclaim] to ready for the next

reclosing. For permanent fault, the device will operate to trip again after the reclosing is performed,

and the device will output the signal of reclosing failure [79.Fail_Rcls].

[79.N_Rcls]>1 means multi-shot reclosing. For multi-shot reclosing in 1-pole AR mode, the first

reclosing is 1-pole AR, and the subsequent reclosing can only be 3-pole AR. For single-phase

transient fault on the line, line protection device will operate to trip and then 1-pole AR is initiated.

After the dead time delay of the first reclosing is expired, the device will send reclosing pulse, and

then the auto-reclosure will drop off after the time delay [79.t_Reclaim] to ready for the next

reclosing. For permanent fault, the device will operate to trip again after the reclosing is performed,

and then 3-pole AR is initiated. At this time, the time delay applies the setting [79.t_Dd_3PS2].

After the time delay is expired, if the reclosing condition is met, the device will send reclosing pulse.

The sequence is repeated until the reclosing is successful or the maximum permit reclosing

number [79.N_Rcls] is reached. If the first fault is multi-phase fault, the device operates to trip

3 Operation Theory


three-phase and initiate 3-pole AR. At this time, the time delay applies the setting [79.t_Dd_3PS1].

For the possible reclosing times of 3-pole AR in 1-pole AR mode, please refer to Table 3.11-2.

2. 3-pole AR

[79.N_Rcls]=1 means one-shot reclosing. For one-shot 3-pole AR mode, line protection device will

operate to trip when a transient fault occurs on the line and 3-pole AR will be initiated. After the

dead time delay for 3-pole AR is expired, the device will send reclosing pulse, and then the

auto-reclosure will drop off after the time delay [79.t_Reclaim] to ready for the next reclosing. For

permanent fault, the device will operate to trip again after the reclosing is performed, and the

device will output the signal of reclosing failure [79.Fail_Rcls].

[79.N_Rcls]>1 means multi-shot reclosing. For multi-shot reclosing in 3-pole AR mode, line

protection device will operate to trip when a transient fault occurs on the line and 3-pole AR will be

initiated. After the dead time delay of the first reclosing is expired, the device will send reclosing

pulse, and then the auto-reclosure will drop off after the time delay [79.t_Reclaim] to ready for the

next reclosing. For permanent fault, the device will operate to trip again after the reclosing is

performed, and then 3-pole AR is initiated after the tripping contact drops off. After the time delay

for AR is expired, the device will send reclosing pulse. The sequence is repeated until the

reclosing is successful or the maximum permit reclosing number [79.N_Rcls] is reached.

3. 1/3-pole AR

[79.N_Rcls]=1 means one-shot reclosing. For one-shot 1/3-pole AR mode, line protection device

will operate to trip when a transient fault occurs on the line and 1-pole AR will be initiated for

single-phase fault and 3-pole AR will be initiated for multi-phase fault. After respective dead time

delay for AR is expired, the device will send reclosing pulse, and then the auto-reclosure will drop

off after the time delay [79.t_Reclaim] to ready for the next reclosing. For permanent fault, the

device will operate to trip again after the reclosing is performed, and the device will output the

signal of reclosing failure [79.Fail_Rcls].

[79.N_Rcls]>1 means multi-shot reclosing. For multi-shot reclosing in 1/3-pole AR mode, line

protection device will operate to trip when a transient fault occurs on the line and AR will be

initiated. After the dead time delay of the first reclosing is expired, the device will send reclosing

pulse, and then the auto-reclosure will drop off after the time delay [79.t_Reclaim] to ready for the

next reclosing. For permanent fault, the device will operate to trip again after the reclosing is

performed, and then 3-pole AR is initiated after the tripping contact drops off. After the time delay

for AR is expired, the device will send reclosing pulse. The sequence is repeated until the

reclosing is successful or the maximum permit reclosing number [79.N_Rcls] is reached. For the

possible reclosing times of 3-pole AR in 1/3-pole AR mode, please refer to Table 3.11-2.

The table below shows the number of reclose attempts with respect to the settings and AR modes.

Table 3.11-2 Reclosing number

Setting Value 1-pole AR 3-pole AR 1/3-pole AR

N-1AR N-3AR N-1AR N-3AR N-1AR N-3AR

1 1 0 0 1 1 1

2 1 1 0 2 1 2

3 Operation Theory


3 1 2 0 3 1 3

4 1 3 0 4 1 4

N-1AR: the reclosing number of 1-pole AR

N-3AR: the reclosing number of 3-pole AR

4. Coordination between dual auto-reclosures

Duplicated protection configurations are normally applied for UHV lines. If reclosing function is

integrated within line protections, the auto-reclosing function can be enabled in any or both of the

line protections without coordination.

If both sets of reclosing functions are enabled, when one of them first recloses onto a permanent

fault, the other will block the reclosing pulse according to the latest condition of the faulty phase.

For one-shot AR mode, if the current is detected in the faulty phase, AR will be blocked

immediately to prevent the circuit breaker from repetitive reclosing. For multi-shot AR mode, if the

current is detected in the faulty phase, the current reclosing pulse will be blocked and go into the

next reclosing pulse logic automatically. If the maximum permitted reclosing number [79.N_Rcls] is

reached, the auto-reclosure will drop off after the time delay [79.t_Reclaim].

For one-shot or multi-shot AR, there is a corresponding reclosing counter at each stage. After

reclosing pulse is sent, the corresponding reclosing counter will plus 1 and the reclosing counter

may be cleared by the submenu “Clear Counter”. If the circuit breaker is reclosed by other

devices during AR initiation, the auto-reclosure will go into the next reclosing pulse logic.

3.11.5.6 AR Time Sequence Diagram

The following two examples indicate typical time sequence of AR process for transient fault and

permanent fault respectively.

3 Operation Theory


Trip

Fault

CB 52bOpen

79.t_Reclaim

79.Inprog

79.Ok_Chk

[79.t_Dd_1PS1]

AR Out

79.Perm_Trp3P

79.Active

[79.t_Reclaim]

79.Inprog_1P [79.t_Dd_1PS1]

79.Fail_Rcls

Time

[79.t_PW_AR]

Signal

Figure 3.11-10 Single-phase transient fault

Trip

Fault

52b

79.t_Reclaim

79.Inprog

79.Ok_Chk

AR Out

79.Perm_Trp3P

79.Active

[79.t_Reclaim]

79.Inprog_1P [79.t_Dd_1PS1]

79.Fail_Rcls

[79.t_PW_AR]

79.Inprog_3PS2 [79.t_Dd_3PS2]

Open Open

200ms

[79.t_PW_AR]

Time

Signal

Figure 3.11-11 Single-phase permanent fault ([79.N_Rcls]=2)

3 Operation Theory


3.11.6 Settings

Table 3.11-3 Settings of auto-reclosing


1 79.N_Rcls 1~4 1 Maximum number of reclosing attempts

2 79.t_Dd_1PS1 0.000~600.000 0.001 s Dead time of first shot 1-pole reclosing

3 79.t_Dd_3PS1 0.000~600.000 0.001 s Dead time of first shot 3-pole reclosing

4 79.t_Dd_3PS2 0.000~600.000 0.001 s Dead time of second shot 3-pole

reclosing

5 79.t_Dd_3PS3 0.000~600.000 0.001 s Dead time of third shot 3-pole reclosing

6 79.t_Dd_3PS4 0.000~600.000 0.001 s Dead time of fourth shot 3-pole

reclosing

7 79.t_CBClsd 0.000~600.000 0.001 s Time delay of circuit breaker in closed

position before reclosing

8 79.t_CBReady 0.000~600.000 0.001 s

Time delay to wait for CB healthy, and

begin to timing when the input signal

[79.CB_Healthy] is de-energized and if

it is not energized within this time delay,

AR will be blocked.

9 79.t_Wait_Chk 0.000~600.000 0.001 s Maximum wait time for synchronism

check

10 79.t_Fail 0.000~600.000 0.001 s Time delay allow for CB status change

to conform reclosing successful

11 79.t_DDO_AR 0.000~600.000 0.001 s Pulse width of AR closing signal

12 79.t_Reclaim 0.000~600.000 0.001 s Reclaim time of AR

13 79.t_PersistTrp 0.000~600.000 0.001 s Time delay of excessive trip signal to

block auto-reclosing

14 79.t_DDO_BlkAR 0.000~600.000 0.001 s

Drop-off time delay of blocking AR,

when blocking signal for AR

disappears, AR blocking condition

drops off after this time delay

15 79.t_AddDly 0.000~600.000 0.001 s Additional time delay for auto-reclosing

16 79.t_WaitMaster 0.000~600.000 0.001 s Maximum wait time for reclosing

permissive signal from master AR

17 79.t_SecFault 0.000~600.000 0.001 s

Time delay of discriminating another

fault, and begin to times after 1-pole AR

initiated, 3-pole AR will be initiated if

another fault happens during this time

delay. AR will be blocked if another fault

happens after that.

18 79.En_PDF_Blk 0 or 1 Enabling/disabling auto-reclosing

3 Operation Theory


blocked when a fault occurs under pole

disagreement condition

0: disable

1: enable

19 79.En_AddDly 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling auto-reclosing with

an additional dead time delay

0: disable

1: enable

20 79.En_CutPulse 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling adjust the length of

reclosing pulse

0: disable

1: enable

21 79.En_FailCheck 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling confirm whether AR

is successful by checking CB state

0: disable

1: enable

22 79.En 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling auto-reclosing

0: disable

1: enable

23 79.En_ExtCtrl 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling AR by external input

signal besides logic setting [79.En]

0: only logic setting

1: logic setting and external input signal

24 79.En_CBInit 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling AR be initiated by

open state of circuit breaker

0: disable

1: enable

25 79.Opt_Priority 0, 1 or 2

Option of AR priority

0：None (single-breaker arrangement)

1：High (master AR of multi-breaker

arrangement)

2： Low (slave AR of multi-breaker

arrangement)

26 79.SetOpt 0 or 1

Control option of AR mode

1: select AR mode by internal logic

settings

0: select AR mode by external input

signals

27 79.En_1PAR 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling 1-pole AR mode

0: disable

1: enable

28 79.En_3PAR 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling 3-pole AR mode

0: disable

1: enable

3 Operation Theory


29 79.En_1P/3PAR 0 or 1

Enabling/disabling 1/3-pole AR mode

0: disable

1: enable

3.12 Trip Logic

3.12.1 Application

For any enabled protection tripping elements, their operation signal will convert to appropriate

tripping signals through trip logics and then trigger output contacts by configuration.


This module gathers signals from phase selection and protection tripping elements and then

converts the operation signal from protection tripping elements to appropriate tripping signals. The

device can implement phase-segregated tripping or three-phase tripping, and may output the

contact of blocking AR and the contact of initiating breaker failure protection.

3.12.3 I/O Signals

Table 3.12-1 I/O signals of trip logic


1 TrpOut.En Trip enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or programmable logic etc.

2 TrpOut.Blk Trip blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or programmable logic etc.

3 Op_CBProt

Protection operation elements, includes phase overcurrent protection, earth fault

protection, pole discrepancy protection, dead zone protection, breaker failure

protection and etc.

4 PrepTrp3P

Input signal of permitting three-phase tripping

When this signal is valid, three-phase tripping will be adopted for any kind of

faults.


1 TrpOut.En Trip output is enabled

2 TrpA Tripping phase-A circuit breaker

3 TrpB Tripping phase-B circuit breaker

4 TrpC Tripping phase-C circuit breaker

5 Trp Tripping any phase of circuit breaker

6 Trp3P Tripping three-phase circuit breaker

7 BFI_A Protection tripping signal of A-phase configured to initiate BFP, BFI signal shall be

reset immediately after tripping signal drops off.

8 BFI_B Protection tripping signal of B-phase configured to initiate BFP, BFI signal shall be


9 BFI_C Protection tripping signal of C-phase configured to initiate BFP, BFI signal shall be


3 Operation Theory


3.12.4 Logic

SIG Ia>0.06In

TrpA&

t_Dwell_Trp 0SIG 50BF.Op_ReTrpA

>=1

0 t_Dwell_Trp&

SIG Ib>0.06In

TrpB&

t_Dwell_Trp 0SIG 50BF.Op_ReTrpB

>=1

0 t_Dwell_Trp&

SIG Ic>0.06In

TrpC&

t_Dwell_Trp 0SIG 50BF.Op_ReTrpC

>=1

0 t_Dwell_Trp&

SIG Max(Ia,Ib,Ic)>0.06In

Trp3P&

t_Dwell_Trp 0

SIG Op_CBProt

>=1

0 t_Dwell_Trp&

SIG Prep3PTrp

>=1

>=1

&

>=1

Trp

SIG 50/51Gx.Op

&

&

&

&

BFI

BFI_C

BFI_B

BFI_A

SIG TrpC

SIG TrpB

SIG TrpA

SIG Trp

>=1

SIG 50/51Px.Op

Figure 3.12-1 Simplified trip logic

All operation elements (except for re-tripping element) are 3 phase tripping elements.

3 Operation Theory


3.12.5 Settings

Table 3.12-2 Settings of trip logic


1 t_Dwell_Trp 0.000~10.000 0.001 s

The dwell time of tripping command, empirical

value is 0.04

The tripping contact shall drop off under

conditions of no current or protection tripping

element drop-off.

3.13 VT Circuit Supervision


The purpose of VT circuit supervision is to detect whether VT circuit is normal. Some protection

functions should be disabled when VT circuit fails.

VT circuit failure can be caused by many reasons, such as fuse blown due to short-circuit fault,

poor contact of VT circuit, VT maintenance and so on. The device can detect them and issue an

alarm signal to block relevant protection functions. However, the alarm of VT circuit failure should

not be issued when the following cases happen.

1. Line VT is used as protection VT and the protected line is out of service.

2. Only current protection functions are enabled and VT is not connected to the device.


VT circuit supervision can detect failure of single-phase, two-phase and three-phase on protection

VT. Under normal condition, the device continuously supervises input voltage from VT, VT circuit

failure signal will be activated if residual voltage exceeds the threshold value or positive-sequence

voltage is lower than the threshold value. If the device is under pickup state due to system fault or

other abnormality, VT circuit supervision will be disabled.

Under normal conditions, the device detect residual voltage greater than 8% of Unn to determine

single-phase or two-phase VT circuit failure, and detect three times positive-sequence voltage less

than Unn to determine three-phase VT circuit failure. Upon detecting abnormality on VT circuit, an

alarm will comes up after a time delay of [VTS.t_DPU] and drop off with a time delay of

[VTS.t_DDO] after VT circuit restored to normal.

VT (secondary circuit) MCB auxiliary contact as a binary input can be connected to the binary

input circuit of the device. If MCB is open (i.e. [VTS.MCB_VT] is energized), the device will

consider the VT circuit is not in a good condition and issues an alarm without a time delay. If the

auxiliary contact is not connected to the device, VT circuit supervision will be issued with time

delay as mentioned in previous paragraph.

When VT is not connected into the device, the alarm will be not issued if the logic setting

[VTS.En_Out_VT] is set as “1”. However, the alarm is still issued if the binary input [VTS.MCB_VT]

3 Operation Theory


is energized, no matter that the logic setting [VTS.En_Out_VT] is set as “1” or “0”.

When VT neutral point fails, third harmonic of residual voltage is comparatively large. If third

harmonic amplitude of residual voltage is larger than 0.2Unn and without operation of fault

detector element, VT neutral point failure alarm signal [VTNS.Alm] will be issued after a time delay

of [VTS.t_DPU] and drop off with a time delay of [VTS.t_DDO] after three phases voltage restored

to normal.


VTS

VTS.Alm

VTS.MCB_VT

VTS.En

VTS.Blk

VTNS

VTNS.En

VTNS.Blk

VTNS.Alm

3.13.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.13-1 I/O signals of VT circuit supervision


1 VTS.En VT supervision enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or programmable

logic etc.

2 VTS.Blk VT supervision blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or programmable

logic etc.

3 VTNS.En VT neutral point supervision enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or


4 VTNS.Blk VT neutral point supervision blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or


5 VTS.MCB_VT Binary input for VT MCB auxiliary contact


1 VTS.Alm Alarm signal to indicate VT circuit fails

2 VTNS.Alm Alarm signal to indicate VT neutral point fails

3 Operation Theory


3.13.5 Logic

SIG 3U0>0.08Unn

SIG 3U1<Unn

EN [VTS.En_LineVT]

SIG 52b_3P

EN [VTS.En]

BI [VTS.MCB_VT]

VTS.Alm

&

>=1

&

>=1

&

>=1

EN [VTS.En_Out_VT]

SIG [VTS.En]

SIG [VTS.Blk]

&

&

VTS.t_DPU VTS.t_DDO

Figure 3.13-1 Logic diagram of VT circuit supervision

OTH U03>0.2Unn

VTNS.Al

m

&

&

EN [VTS.En_Out_VT]

EN [VTS.En]

SIG [VTNS.En]

SIG [VTNS.Blk]

&

VTS.t_DPU VTS.t_DDO

Figure 3.13-2 Logic diagram of VT neutral point supervision

Unn: rated phase-to-phase voltage

U03: third harmonic amplitude of neutral point residual voltage

3.13.6 Settings

Table 3.13-2 Settings of VT circuit supervision


1 VTS.t_DPU 0.200~100.000 0.001 s Pick-up time delay of VT circuit supervision

2 VTS.t_DDO 0.200~100.000 0.001 s Drop-off time delay of VT circuit

supervision

3 VTS.En_Out_VT 0 or 1

No voltage used for protection calculation

1: enable

0: disable

In general, when VT is not connected to the

device, this logic setting should be set as

“1”

4 VTS.En_LineVT 0 or 1

Voltage selection for protection calculation

from busbar VT or line VT

1: line VT

0: busbar VT

3 Operation Theory


5 VTS.En 0 or 1

Alarm function of VT circuit supervision

1: enable

0: disable

3.14 CT Circuit Supervision

3.14.1 Application

The purpose of the CT circuit supervision is to detect any abnormality on CT secondary circuit.


Under normal conditions, CT secondary signal is continuously supervised by detecting the

residual current and voltage. If residual current is larger than 10%In whereas residual voltage is

less than 3V, an error in CT circuit is considered, the concerned protection functions are blocked

and an alarm is issued with a time delay of 10s and drop off with a time delay of 10s after CT

circuit is restored to normal condition.


CTS

CTS.En CTS.Alm

CTS.Blk

3.14.4 I/O Signals

Table 3.14-1 I/O signals of CT circuit supervision


1 U3P Three-phase voltage input


3 CTS.En CT circuit supervision enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or


4 CTS.Blk CT circuit supervision blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or



1 CTS.Alm Alarm signal to indicate CT circuit fails

3 Operation Theory


3.14.5 Logic

OTH 3I0>0.1In

CTS.Alm

&

OTH 3U0<3V

10s 10s

Figure 3.14-1 Logic diagram of CT circuit failure

3 Operation Theory


4 Supervision


4 Supervision

Table of Contents

4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 4-1

4.2 Supervision Alarms ......................................................................................... 4-1

4.3 Relay Self-supervision .................................................................................... 4-6

4.3.1 Relay Hardware Monitoring ................................................................................................. 4-6

4.3.2 Fault Detector Monitoring .................................................................................................... 4-6

4.3.3 Check Setting ...................................................................................................................... 4-7

4.4 AC Input Monitoring ........................................................................................ 4-7

4.4.1 Voltage/Current Drift Monitoring and Auto-adjustment ........................................................ 4-7

4.4.2 Sampling Monitoring ............................................................................................................ 4-7

4.5 Secondary Circuit Monitoring ........................................................................ 4-7

4.5.1 Opto-coupler Power Supervision ......................................................................................... 4-7

4.5.2 Circuit Breaker Supervision ................................................................................................. 4-7

4.6 GOOSE Alarm .................................................................................................. 4-7

List of Tables

Table 4.2-1 Alarm description .................................................................................................... 4-1

Table 4.2-2 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................... 4-4

4 Supervision


4 Supervision


4.1 Overview

Protection system is in quiescent state under normal conditions, and it is required to respond

promptly for faults which occurr on power system. When the device is in energizing process before

the LED “HEALTHY” is on, the device need to be checked to ensure no abnormality. Therefore,

the automatic supervision function, which checks the health of the protection system when startup

and during normal operation, plays an important role.

The numerical relay based on the microprocessor operations is suitable for implementing this

automatic supervision function of the protection system.

In case a defect is detected during initialization when DC power supply is provided to the device,

the device will be blocked with indication and alarm of relay out of service. It is suggested a trial

recovery of the device by re-energization. Please contact supplier if the device is still failure.

When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed by a LCD message, LED

indication and alarm contact outputs. The failure alarm is also recorded in event recording report

and can be printed If required.

4.2 Supervision Alarms

Hardware circuit and operation status of the device are self-supervised continuously. If any

abnormal condition is detected, information or report will be displayed and a corresponding alarm

will be issued.

A minor abnormality may block a certain number of protections functions while the other functions

can still work. However, if severe hardware failure or abnormality, such as PWR module failure,

DC converter failure and so on, are detected, all protection functions will be blocked and the LED

“HEALTHY” will be extinguished and blocking output contacts BO_FAIL will be given. The

protective device then can not work normally and maintenance is required to eliminate the failure.

All the alarm signals and the corresponding handling suggestions are listed below.

NOTE!

If the protective device is blocked or alarm signal is sent during operation, please do find

out its reason with the help of self-diagnostic record. If the reason can not be found at site,

please notify the factory NR. Please do not simply press button “TARGET RESET” on the

protection panel or re-energize on the device.

Table 4.2-1 Alarm description

No. Item Description Blocking

Device

Fail Signals

1 Fail_Device

The device fails.

This signal will be pick up if any fail signal picks up

and it will drop off when all fail signals drop off.

Blocked

4 Supervision


2 Fail_Setting_OvRange

Set value of any setting is out of scope.

This signal will pick up instantaneously and will be

latched unless the recommended handling

suggestion is adopted.

Blocked

3 Fail_BoardConfig

Mismatch between the configuration of plug-in

modules and the designing drawing of an

applied-specific project.

Blocked

4 Fail_SettingItem_Chgd

After config file is updated, settings of the file and

settings saved on the device are not matched.




Blocked

5 Fail_Memory

Error is found during checking memory data.




Blocked

6 Fail_Settings

Error is found during checking settings.




Blocked

7 Fail_DSP

DSP chip is damaged.




Blocked

8 Fail_DSP_Comm

Communication between two DSP chips is

abnormal

This signal will pick up instantaneously and will

drop off instantaneously.

Blocked

9 Fail_Config

Software configuation is incorrect.




Blocked

10 Fail_Sample

AC current and voltage samplings are abnormal.

This signal will pick up with a time delay of 200ms

and will be latched unless the recommended

handling suggestion is adopted.

Blocked

11 MCBrd.Fail_Sample

For DSP plug-in module for measurement and

control in slot 06, AC current and voltage samplings

are abnormal

Blocked

12 MCBrd.Fail_Settings

Error is found during checking the settings of DSP

plug-in module for measurement and control in slot

06.

Blocked

Alarm Signals

13 Alm_Device The device is abnormal. Unblocked

4 Supervision


This signal will be pick up if any alarm signal picks

up and it will drop off when all alarm signals drop

off.

14 Alm_Insuf_Memory The memory of MON plug-in module is insufficient. Unblocked

15 Alm_CommTest

The device is in the communication test mode.



Unblocked

16 Alm_Settings_MON

The error is found during MON module checking

settings of device.

This signal will pick up with a time delay of 10s and

will be latched unless re-powering or rebooting the

device.

Unblocked

17 Alm_Version

The error is found during checking the version of

software downloaded to the device.



Unblocked

18 Alm_BI_SettingGrp

The active group set by settings in device and that

set by binary input are not matched.



Unblocked

19 Alm_DSP_Frame

Data frame is abnormal between two DSP

modules.



Unblocked

20 Bxx.Alm_OptoDC

The power supply of BI plug-in module in slot xx is

abnormal.


will drop off with a time delay of 10s.

Unblocked

21 Alm_Pkp_FD

Fault detector element operates for longer than

50s.



Unblocked

22 Alm_Pkp_I0

Neutral current fault detector element operates for

longer than 10s.



Unblocked

23 VTS.Alm

Protection VT circuit fails.

This signal will pick up with a time delay of

[VTS.t_DPU] and drop off with a time delay of

[VTS.t_DDO].

Unblocked

24 VTNS.Alm

Protection VT circuit of neutral point fails.

This signal will pick up with a time delay of

[VTS.t_DPU] and drop off with a time delay of

[VTS.t_DDO].

Unblocked

4 Supervision


25 CTS.Alm

CT circuit of corresponding circuit breaker fails.



Unblocked

26 Alm_52b

The auxiliary normally closed contact (52b) of

corresponding circuit breaker is abnormal.



Unblocked

27 BI_Maintenance

The device is in maintenance state.


and will drop off with a time delay of 150ms.

Unblocked

28 Alm_TimeSync Time synchronization abnormality alarm. Unblocked

29 Alm_Freq

Frequency of the system is higher than 65Hz or

lower than 45Hz.


and will drop off with a time delay of 10s.

Unblocked

30 Alm_Sparexx (xx=01~08)

Spare alarm signals

The time delay of pickup and dropoff for these

alarm signals can be set by PCS-Explorer.

Unblocked

Protection Element Alarm Signals

31 25.Alm_VTS_UB

Synchronism voltage circuit is abnormal (UB)

This signal will pick up with a time delay of 1.25s


Unblocked

32 25.Alm_VTS_UL

Synchronism voltage circuit is abnormal (UL)

This signal will pick up with a time delay of 1.25s


Unblocked

33 79.Fail_Rcls Auto-reclosing fails. Unblocked

34 79.Fail_Chk Synchrocheck for AR fails. Unblocked

Table 4.2-2 Troubleshooting

No. Item Handling suggestion

Fail Signals

1 Fail_Device The signal is issued with other specific fail signals, and please refer to the

handling suggestion other specific alarm signals.

2 Fail_Setting_OvRange

Please reset setting values according to the range described in the instruction

manual, then re-power or reboot the device and the device will restore to

normal operation state.

3 Fail_BoardConfig

1. Go to the menu “Information→Borad Info”, check the abnormality

information.

2. For the abnormality board, if the board is not used, then remove, and if

the board is used, then check whether the board is installed properly and work

normally.

4 Fail_SettingItem_Chgd Please check the settings mentioned in the prompt message on the LCD, and

go to the menu “Settings” and select “Confirm_Settings” item to comfirm

app:ds:prompt

app:ds:message

4 Supervision


settings. Then, the device will restore to normal operation stage.

5 Fail_Memory Please inform the manufacture or the agent for repair.

6 Fail_Settings Please inform the manufacture or the agent for repair.

7 Fail_DSP Chips are damaged and please inform the manufacture or the agent replacing

the module.

8 Fail_DSP_Comm Please inform the manufacture or the agent for repair.

9 Fail_Config Please inform configuration engineers to check and confirm visualization

functions of the device

10 Fail_Sample

1. Please make the device out of service.

2. Then check if the analog input modules and wiring connectors

connected to those modules are installed at the position.

3. Re-power the device and the device will restore to normal operation

state.

11 MCBrd.Fail_Sample

1. Please make the device out of service.

2. Then check if analog input modules and wiring connectors connected to

those modules are installed at the position.

3. Re-power the device and the device will restore to normal operation state.

12 MCBrd.Fail_Settings Please inform the manufacturer or the agent for repair.

Alarm Signals

13 Alm_Device The signal is issued with other specific alarm signals, and please refer to the

handling suggestion other specific alarm signals.

14 Alm_Insuf_Memory Please replace MON plug-in module.

15 Alm_CommTest No special treatment is needed, and disable the communication test function

after the completion of the test.

16 Alm_Settings_MON Please inform the manufacture or the agent for repair.

17 Alm_Version

Users may pay no attention to the alarm signal in the project commissioning

stage, but it is needed to download the latest package file (including correct

version checksum file) provided by R&D engineer to make the alarm signal

disappear. Then users get the correct software version. It is not allowed that

the alarm signal is issued on the device already has been put into service. the

devices having being put into service so that the alarm signal disappears.

18 Alm_BI_SettingGrp

Please check the value of setting [Active_Grp] and binary input of indiating

active group, and make them matched. Then the “ALARM” LED will be

extinguished and the corresponding alarm message will disappear and the

device will restore to normal operation state.

19 Alm_DSP_Frame Please inform the manufacture or the agent for repair.

20 Bxx.Alm_OptoDC

1. check whether the binary input module is connected to the power supply.

2. check whether the voltage of power supply is in the required range.

3. After the voltage for binary input module restores to normal range, the

“ALARM” LED will be extinguished and the corresponding alarm message will

disappear and the device will restore to normal operation state.

21 Alm_Pkp_FD

Please check secondary values and protection settings. If settings are not set

reasonable to make fault detectors pick up, please reset settings, and then

the alarm message will disappear and the device will restore to normal

4 Supervision


operation state.

22 Alm_Pkp_I0

Please check secondary values and protection settings. If settings are not set

reasonable to make fault detectors pick up, please reset settings, and then

the alarm message will disappear and the device will restore to normal

operation state.

23 VTS.Alm Please check the corresponding VT secondary circuit. After the abnormality is

eliminated, the device returns to normal operation state.

24 VTNS.Alm Please check the corresponding VT secondary circuit of neutral point. After

the abnormality is eliminated, the device returns to normal operation state.

25 CTS.Alm Please check the corresponding CT secondary circuit. After the abnormality is

eliminated, the device returns to normal operation state.

26 Alm_52b Please check the auxiliary contact of CB. After the abnormality is eliminated,

the device returns to normal operation state.

27 BI_Maintenance

After maintenance is finished, please de-energized the binary input

[BI_Maintenance] and then the alarm will disappear and the device restore to

normal operation state.

28 Alm_TimeSync

1. check whether the selected clock synchronization mode matches the

clock synchronization source;

2. check whether the wiring connection between the device and the clock

synchronization source is correct

3. check whether the setting for selecting clock synchronization (i.e.

[Opt_TimeSync]) is set correctly. If there is no clock synchronization, please

set the setting [Opt_TimeSync] as ”No TimeSync”.

4. After the abnormality is removed, the “ALARM” LED will be extinguished

and the corresponding alarm message will disappear and the device will

restore to normal operation state.

29 Alm_Freq Adjust the system operating mode

30 Alm_Sparexx

(xx=01~08)

Find the reason according to specific problem. (These signals are

user-defined.)

4.3 Relay Self-supervision

4.3.1 Relay Hardware Monitoring

All chips on DSP module are monitored to ensure whether they are damaged or having errors. If

any one of them is detected damaged or having error, the alarm signal [Fail_DSP] is issued with

the device being blocked.

4.3.2 Fault Detector Monitoring

When neutral current fault detector picks up and lasts for longer than 10 seconds, an alarm

[Alm_Pkp_I0] will be issued without the device blocked.

When any fault detector picks up for longer than 50s, an alarm will be issued [Alm_Pkp_FD]

4 Supervision


without the device blocked.

4.3.3 Check Setting

This relay has 10 setting groups, only one setting group could be activiated (is active) at a time.

The settings of active setting group are checked to ensure they are reasonable. If settings are

checked to be unreasonable or out of setting scopes, a corresponding alarm signal will be issued,

and the device is also blocked.

4.4 AC Input Monitoring

4.4.1 Voltage/Current Drift Monitoring and Auto-adjustment

Zero point of voltage and current may drift due to variation of temperature or other environment

factors. The device continually traces the drift and adjust it to normal value automatically.

4.4.2 Sampling Monitoring

AC current and voltage samplings of protection DSP and fault detector DSP are monitored and if

the samples of protection DSP and fault detector DSP are detected to be wrong or inconsistent

between them, the alarm signal [Fail_Sample] will be issued and the device will be blocked.

4.5 Secondary Circuit Monitoring

4.5.1 Opto-coupler Power Supervision

Positive power supply of opto-coupler is continually monitored. If an error or damage has occurred,

an alarm [Bxx.Alm_OptoDC] will be issued.

4.5.2 Circuit Breaker Supervision

If 52b of three phases are energized ,which indicates circuit breaker is open and there is no

current detected in the line, the line will be considered to be out of service.

If 52b of three phases are energized that indicates circuit breaker is open but current is still

detected in the line (the measured current is greater than a settable threshold value) or

three-phase circuit breaker is in pole disagreement condition, an alarm signal [Alm_52b] will be

issued after 10s.

4.6 GOOSE Alarm


1 GAlm_AStorm_SL GOOSE alarm signal indicating that there is a network storm occurring on the

network A.

2 GAlm_BStorm_SL GOOSE alarm signal indicating that there is a network storm occurring on the

network B.

3 GAlm_CfgFile_SL GOOSE alarm signal indicating that there is an error in the GOOSE

configuration file

4 Namexx.GAlm_ADisc_SL_xx GOOSE alarm signal indicating that network A for Namexx is disconnected.

4 Supervision



5 Namexx.GAlm_BDisc_SL_xx GOOSE alarm signal indicating that network B for Namexx is disconnected.

6 Namexx.GAlm_Cfg_SL_xx Between GOOSE control blocks received on network and GOOSE control

blocks defined in GOOSE.txt file are unmatched for Namexx.

These are GOOSE alarm reports. When any alarm message is issued, the LED “ALARM” is lit without

the device being blocked. After the abnormality is removed, the device will return to normal with the

LED “ALARM” being distinguished automatically.

No. Output Signal Handling suggestion

1 GAlm_AStorm_SL Please check the related switches

2 GAlm_BStorm_SL Please check the related switches

3 GAlm_CfgFile_SL Please check the GOOSE configuration file (i.e. GOOSE.txt)

4 Namexx.GAlm_ADisc_SL_xx Please check the network

5 Namexx.GAlm_BDisc_SL_xx Please check the network

6 Namexx.GAlm_Cfg_SL_xx Please check the GOOSE configuration file and the network

Namexx is the name defined by the setting [Linkxx], xx=01, 02, 03, …, 64

5 Management


5 Management

Table of Contents

5.1 Measurement ................................................................................................... 5-1

5.2 Recording ........................................................................................................ 5-3

5.2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 5-3

5.2.2 Event Recording .................................................................................................................. 5-3

5.2.3 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 5-3

5.2.4 Disturbance Recording ........................................................................................................ 5-4

5.2.5 Present Recording ............................................................................................................... 5-5

5 Management


5 Management


5.1 Measurement

PCS-921 performs continuous measurement of the analogue input quantities. The current full

scale of relay is 40 times of rated current, and there is no effect to the performance of IED due to

overflowing of current full scale. The device samples 24 points per cycle and calculates the RMS

value in each interval and updated the LCD display in every 0.5 second. The measurement data

can be displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on the local/remote PC via software tool.

Navigate the menu to view the sampling value through LCD screen.

This device can be used for one or two circuit breaker configuration. If it is used for two circuit

breakers configuration, some corresponding metering will be suffixed by CBn (n is the number of

the CB and it can be 1 and 2).

1. RMS Values

Access path: Press key “▲” to enter main menu firstly. Select the item “Measurements “ and

press key “ENT” to enter, and then select submenu “Measurements1” (from protection DSP) or

“Measurements2” (from fault detector DSP). Press key “ENT” to display corresponding

measurement values as below on the LCD.

Magnitude of phase current Ia, Ib, Ic

Magnitude of positive-sequence and negative-sequence current (I1, I2)

Magnitude of calculated residual current 3I0

Magnitude of three-phase protection voltage Ua, Ub, Uc (i.e. UL1)

Magnitude of phase-to-phase voltage Uab, Ubc, Uca

Magnitude of synchronism voltage Usyn

Magnitude of positive-sequence and negative-sequence voltage (U1, U2)

Magnitude of calculated residual voltage (3U0)

Frequency of protection voltage (f)

Frequency of synchronism voltage (f_Syn)

Frequency difference (f_Diff)

Voltage difference (U_Diff)

2. Phase Angle

No. Symbol Definition

1 Ang(Ua-Ub) Phase angle difference for A-phase voltage relative to B-phase voltage

2 Ang(Ub-Uc) Phase angle difference for B-phase voltage relative to C-phase voltage

3 Ang(Uc-Ua) Phase angle difference for C-phase voltage relative to A-phase voltage

4 Ang(Ua-Ia) Phase angle difference for A-phase voltage relative to A-phase current

5 Management


5 Ang(Ub-Ib) Phase angle difference for B-phase voltage relative to B-phase current

6 Ang(Uc-Ic) Phase angle difference for C-phase voltage relative to C-phase current

7 Ang(Ia-Ib) Phase angle difference for A-phase current relative to B-phase current

8 Ang(Ib-Ic) Phase angle difference for B-phase current relative to C-phase current

9 Ang(Ic-Ia) Phase angle difference for C-phase current relative to A-phase current

10 phi_Diff Phase angle difference between two synchronism voltages

3. Metering of the primary value

Access path:

1) Press key “▲” to enter main menu firstly.

2) Select the item “Measurements “ and press key “ENT” to enter, and then

3) Select submenu “Measurements3”.

4) Press key “ENT” to display corresponding measurement values as below on the LCD.

No. Symbol Definition Unit

1 Ia The primary value of A-phase current of line (Ia) A

2 Ib The primary value of B-phase current of line (Ib) A

3 Ic The primary value of C-phase current of line (Ic) A

4 I1 The primary value of positive-sequence current (I1) A

5 I2 The primary value of negative-sequence current (I2) A

6 3I0 The primary value of calculated residual current (3I0) A

7 Ua The primary value of A-phase voltage (Ua) kV

8 Ub The primary value of B-phase voltage (Ub) kV

9 Uc The primary value of C-phase voltage (Uc) kV

10 Uab The primary value of phase-to-phase voltage (Uab) kV

11 Ubc The primary value of phase-to-phase voltage (Ubc) kV

12 Uca The primary value of phase-to-phase voltage (Uca) kV

13 U1 The primary value of positive-sequence voltage (U1) kV

14 U2 The primary value of negative-sequence voltage (U2) kV

15 3U0 The primary value of calculated residual voltage (3U0) kV

16 U_Syn The primary value of synchronism voltage (U_Syn) kV

17 f The primary value of measurement frequency (f) Hz

18 f_Syn The primary value of synchronism frequency (f_Syn) Hz

19 P The primary value of active power (P) MW

20 Q The primary value of reactive power (Q) MVar

21 S The primary value of apparent power (S) MVA

5 Management


22 Cos The value of power factor (Cos) -

23 Pa The primary value of phase-A active power (P) MW

24 Pb The primary value of phase-B active power (P) MW

25 Pc The primary value of phase-C active power (P) MW

26 Qa The primary value of phase-A reactive power (Q) MVar

27 Qb The primary value of phase-B reactive power (Q) MVar

28 Qc The primary value of phase-C reactive power (Q) MVar

29 Cosa The value of phase-A power factor (Cos) -

30 Cosb The value of phase-B power factor (Cos) -

31 Cosc The value of phase-C power factor (Cos) -

32 f_Diff The frequency difference between reference side and incoming side for CB

synchronism-check. Hz

33 df/dt The df/dt difference between reference side and incoming side for CB

synchronism-check. Hz/s

34 phi_Diff Phase-angle difference between reference side and incoming side for CB

synchronism-check. Deg

35 U_Diff The primary value of voltage difference. kV

36 PHr+_Pri The primary positive active energy. MWh

37 PHr-_Pri The primary negative active energy. MWh

38 QHr+_Pri The primary positive reactive energy. MVAh

39 QHr-_Pri The primary negative reactive energy. MVAh

5.2 Recording

5.2.1 Overview

PCS-921 provides the following recording functions:

1. Event recording

2. Disturbance recording

3. Present recording

All the recorded information except waveform can be viewed on local LCD or by printing.

Waveform could only be printed or extracted with PCS-Explorer software tool and a waveform

analysis software.

5.2.2 Event Recording

5.2.3 Overview

The device can store the latest 1024 disturbance records, 1024 binary events, 1024 supervision

events and 1024 device logs. All the records are stored in non-volatile memory, and when the

available space is exhausted, the oldest record is automatically overwritten by the latest one.

http://dict.cnki.net/dict_result.aspx?searchword=%e5%90%8c%e6%9c%9f%e7%94%b5%e5%8e%8b&tjType=sentence&style=&t=synchronous+voltage






5 Management


5.2.3.1 Disturbance Records

When any protection element operates or drops off, such as fault detector, distance protection etc.,

they will be logged in event records.

5.2.3.2 Supervision Events

The device is under automatic supervision all the time. If there are any failure or abnormal

condition detected, such as, chip damaged, VT circuit failure and so on, it will be logged in event

records.

5.2.3.3 Binary Events

When there is a binary input is energized or de-energized, i.e., its state has changed from “0” to “1”

or from “1” to “0”, it will be logged in event records.

5.2.3.4 Control Logs

When the total number of control command records reaches 256, “Control_Logs” memory area

will be full. If the device receives a new control command now, the oldest control command record

will be deleted, and then the latest control command record will be stored and displayed.

5.2.3.5 Device Logs

If an operator implements some operations on the device, such as reboot protective device,

modify setting, etc., they will be logged in event records.

5.2.4 Disturbance Recording

5.2.4.1 Application

Disturbance records can be used to have a better understanding of the behavior of the power

network and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. Analysis of

the recorded data provides valuable information that can be used to improve existing equipment.

This information can also be used when planning for and designing new installations.

5.2.4.2 Design

A disturbance record consists of fault record and fault waveform. A disturbance record is initiated

by fault detector element.

The disturbance record has two types:

1. Fault detector element picks up without operation of protective element.

2. Fault detector element picks up with operation of protective elements.

5.2.4.3 Capacity and Information of Disturbance Records

The device can store up to 64 disturbance records with waveform in non-volatile memory. It is

based on first in first out queue that the oldest disturbance record will be overwritten by the latest

one.

For each disturbance record, the following items are included:

5 Management


1. Sequence number

Each operation will be recorded with a sequence number in the record and displayed on LCD

screen.

2. Date and time of fault occurrence

The time resolution is 1ms using the relay internal clock synchronized via clock synchronized

device if connected. The date and time is recorded when a system fault is detected.

3. Relative operating time

An operating time (not including the operating time of output relays) is recorded in the record.

4. Faulty phase

5. Protection elements

5.2.4.4 Capacity and Information of Fault Waveform

MON module can store 64 pieces of fault waveform oscillogram in non-volatile memory. If a new

fault occurs when 64 fault waveform have been stored, the oldest will be overwritten by the latest

one.

Each fault record consists of all analog and digital quantities related to protection, such as original

current and voltage, differential current, alarm elements, and binary inputs and etc.

Each time recording includes 12-cycle pre-fault waveform, and 250 cycles at least and 500 cycles

at most can be recorded.

5.2.5 Present Recording

Present recording is a waveform triggered manually on on the device’s LCD or remotely through

PCS-Explorer software. Recording content of present recording is same to that of disturbance

recording.

Each time recording includes 12-cycle waveform before triggering, and 250 cycles at most can be

recorded.

5 Management


6 Hardware


6 Hardware

Table of Contents

6.1 General Description ........................................................................................ 6-1

6.2 Typical Wiring .................................................................................................. 6-4

6.2.1 Conventional CT/VT (For reference only) ........................................................................... 6-4

6.2.2 ECT/EVT (For reference only) ............................................................................................. 6-6

6.2.3 CT Requirement .................................................................................................................. 6-8

6.3 Plug-in Module Description ............................................................................ 6-9

6.3.1 PWR Plug-in Module (Power Supply) ................................................................................. 6-9

6.3.2 MON Plug-in Module (Monitor) ........................................................................................... 6-11

6.3.3 AI Plug-in Module (Analog Input) ....................................................................................... 6-14

6.3.4 DSP Plug-in Module (Logic Proces) .................................................................................. 6-19

6.3.5 NET-DSP Plug-in Module (GOOSE and SV) .................................................................... 6-20

6.3.6 BI Plug-in Module (Binary Input) ....................................................................................... 6-21

6.3.7 BO Plug-in Module (Binary Output) ................................................................................... 6-25

6.3.8 HMI Module ....................................................................................................................... 6-27

List of Figures

Figure 6.1-1 Rear view of fixed module position ..................................................................... 6-1

Figure 6.1-2 Hardware diagram .................................................................................................. 6-2

Figure 6.1-3 Front view of PCS-921 ........................................................................................... 6-3

Figure 6.1-4 Typical rear view of PCS-921 ................................................................................ 6-4

Figure 6.2-1 Typical wiring of PCS-921 (conventional CT/VT) ................................................ 6-5

Figure 6.2-2 Typical wiring of PCS-921 (ECT/EVT) .................................................................. 6-7

Figure 6.3-1 View of PWR plug-in module .............................................................................. 6-10

Figure 6.3-2 Output contacts of PWR plug-in module........................................................... 6-10

Figure 6.3-3 View of MON plug-in module .............................................................................. 6-12

6 Hardware


Figure 6.3-4 Connection of communication terminal ............................................................ 6-14

Figure 6.3-5 Schematic diagram of CT circuit automatically closed ....................................... 6-15

Figure 6.3-6 Current connection of AI plug-in module .......................................................... 6-15

Figure 6.3-7 Voltage connection 1 of AI plug-in module ....................................................... 6-16

Figure 6.3-8 Voltage connection 2 of AI plug-in module ....................................................... 6-16

Figure 6.3-9 View of AI plug-in module (without synchronism voltage switchover) ......... 6-17

Figure 6.3-10 View of AI plug-in module (with synchronism voltage switchover) ............. 6-18

Figure 6.3-11 View of DSP plug-in module ............................................................................. 6-19

Figure 6.3-12 View of NET-DSP plug-in module ..................................................................... 6-20

Figure 6.3-13 View of BI plug-in module (NR1503) ................................................................ 6-21

Figure 6.3-14 View of BI plug-in module (NR1504) ................................................................ 6-22

Figure 6.3-15 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521A) ............................................................ 6-25

Figure 6.3-16 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521C) ............................................................ 6-26

Figure 6.3-17 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521F) ............................................................ 6-27

List of Tables

Table 6.3-1 Terminal definition and description of PWR plug-in module ............................ 6-10

Table 6.3-2 Terminal definition of AI module (without synchronism voltage switchover) 6-17

Table 6.3-3 Terminal definition of AI module (with synchronism voltage switchover) ...... 6-18

6 Hardware


6.1 General Description

PCS-921 adopts 32-bit microchip processor CPU as control core for management and monitoring

function, meanwhile, adopts high-speed digital signal processor DSP for all the protection

calculation. 24 points are sampled in every cycle and parallel processing of sampled data can be

realized in each sampling interval to ensure ultrahigh reliability and safety of the device.

PCS-921 is comprised of intelligent plug-in modules, except that few particular plug-in modules’

position cannot be changed in the whole device (gray plug-in modules as shown in Figure 6.1-1),

other plug-in modules like AI (analog input) and IO (binary input and binary output) can be flexibly

configured in the remaining slot positions.

MO

N m

od

ule

DS

P m

od

ule

PW

R m

od

ule

01 04 05 06 07 P1

AI

mo

du

le

BI

mo

du

le

BO

mo

du

leSlot No.

02 03 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

BI

mo

du

le

BO

mo

du

le

BO

mo

du

le

BO

mo

du

le

DS

P m

od

ule

Figure 6.1-1 Rear view of fixed module position

PCS-921 has 16 slots, PWR plug-in module, MON plug-in module and DSP plug-in module are

assigned at fixed slots.

Besides 4 fixed modules are shown in above figure, there are 12 slots can be flexibly configured.

AI plug-in module, BI plug-in module and BO plug-in module can be configured at position

between slot 02, 03 and 06~15. It should be pay attention that AI plug-in module will occupy two

slots.

This device is developed on the basis of our latest software and hardware platform, and the new

platform major characteristics are of high reliability, networking and great capability in

anti-interference. See Figure 6.1-2 for hardware diagram.

6 Hardware


Conventional CT/VT

Exte

rna

l

Bin

ary

In

pu

t

+E

Pickup

Relay

Protection

Calculation

DSP

A/D

LCD

Fault

Detector

DSP

A/D

CPU

ECVT

ECVT

Power

SupplyUaux

Keypad

LED

Clock SYN

PRINT

ETHERNET

RJ45

Ou

tpu

t Re

lay

Figure 6.1-2 Hardware diagram

The working process of the device is as shown in above figure: current and voltage from

conventional CT/VT are converted into small voltage signal and sent to DSP module after filtered

and A/D conversion for protection calculation and fault detector respectively (ECVT signal is sent

to the device without small signal and A/D convertion). When DSP module completes all the

protection calculation, the result will be recorded in 32-bit CPU on MON module. DSP module

carries out fault detector, protection logic calculation, tripping output, and MON module perfomes

SOE (sequence of event) record, waveform recording, printing, communication between the

device and SAS and communication between HMI and CPU. When fault detector detects a fault

and picks up, positive power supply for output relay is provided.

The items can be flexibly configured depending on the situations like sampling method of the

device (conventional CT/VT or ECT/EVT), and the mode of binary output (conventional binary

output or GOOSE binary output). The configurations for PCS-900 series based on microcomputer

are classified into standard and optional modules.

Table 6.1-1 PCS-921 module configuration

No. ID Module description Remark

1 NR1101/NR1102 Management and monitor module (MON module) standard

2 NR1401 Analog input module (AI module ) standard

3 NR1161 Protection calculation and fault detector module (DSP module) standard

4 NR1503/NR1504 Binary input module (BI module) standard

5 NR1521 Binary output module (BO module) standard

6 NR1301 Power supply module (PWR module) standard

7 NR1136 GOOSE and SV from merging unit by IEC61850-9-2 (NET-DSP

module) option

6 Hardware


No. ID Module description Remark

8 Human machine interface module (HMI module) standard

MON module provides functions like communication with SAS, event record, setting

management etc.

AI module converts AC current and voltage from current transformers and voltage

transformers respectively to small voltage signal.

DSP module performs filtering, sampling, protection calculation and fault detector calculation.

BI module provides binary inputs via opto-couplers with rating voltage among

24V/110V/125V/220V/250V (configurable).

BO module provides output contacts for tripping, and signal output contact for annunciation

signal, remote signal, fault and disturbance signal, operation abnormal signal etc.

PWR module converts DC 250/220/125/110V into various DC voltage levels for modules of

the device.

HMI module is comprised of LCD, keypad, LED indicators and multiplex RJ45 ports for user

as human-machine interface.

NET-DSP module receives and sends GOOSE messages, sampled values (SV) from

merging unit by IEC61850-9-2 protocol.

PCS-921 series is made of a 4U height 19” chassis for flush mounting. Components mounted on

its front include a 320×240 dot matrix LCD, a 9 button keypad, 20 LED indicators and a multiplex

RJ45 port. A monolithic micro controller is installed in the equipment for these functions.

Following figures show front and rear views of PCS-921 respectively.

ENT

ES

CG

RP

PCS-9 211

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

HEALTHY

ALARM BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION

Figure 6.1-3 Front view of PCS-921

20 LED indicators are, from top to bottom, operation (HEALTHY), self-supervision (ALARM),

others are configurable.

For the 9-button keypad, “ENT” is “enter”, “GRP” is “group number” and “ESC” is “escape”.

6 Hardware


NR1102 NR1401

DANGER

NR1161 NR1504 NR1521 NR1521 NR1521 NR1521 NR1301

11

1

9

3

10

8

7

6

4

5

2

12

BO_COM1

BO_ALM

OPTO+

BO_FAIL

BO_ALM

BO_COM2

OPTO-

PWR+

PWR-

GND

BO_FAIL

5V ALM

BO_ALM BO_FAIL

OK

NR1504

ON

OFF

NR1161

Figure 6.1-4 Typical rear view of PCS-921

6.2 Typical Wiring

6.2.1 Conventional CT/VT (For reference only)

MO

N m

od

ule

DS

P m

od

ule

PW

R m

od

ule

01 04 05 07 P1

AI m

od

ule

BI m

od

ule

BO

mo

du

le

Slot No.02 03 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15

NR1301

BO

mo

du

le

BO

mo

du

le

NR1521ANR1504NR1102 NR1401 NR1161 NR1521C NR1521C

DS

P m

od

ule

06

NR1161

BO

mo

du

le

NR1521F

The following typical wiring is given based on above hardware configuration

6 Hardware


Ia

Ib

Ic

0201

0202

0203

0204

0205

0206

0213

0217

0215

0214

0216

0218

0219

0220

0221

0222

0223

0224

Ua

Ub

Uc

UB1

UL2

UB2

Pro

tectio

n V

olta

ge

Syn

ch

ron

ism

Vo

ltag

e

0225

P110

P111

P102

P103

P101

BO_FAIL

BO_ALM

P105

P106

P104

BO_FAIL

BO_ALM

P107

P108

P112

Power

Supply

PWR+

PWR-

OPTO+

OPTO-

External DC power

supply

Power supply for

opto-coupler (24V)

COM

COM

Multiplex

RJ45 (Front)

Grounding

Bus

…

0801

0802

0807

0809

0814

0821

0808…

0816

0815

…

+

+

+

+

+

+

Not used

Not used

Power supply supervision

BI_01

BI_06

BI_07

BI_12

BI_13

BI_18

0822-

PR

INT

ER

0101

0102

0103

0105

0106

0107SGND

RTS

TXD

SYN+

SYN-

SGND

Clo

ck S

YN

PR

INT

0104

0101

0102

0103

A

B

SGND

CO

M

0104

1101

1102

1103

1104

…

1121

1122

1201

1202

1203

1204

…

1221

1222

1301

1302

1303

1304

…

1321

1322

BO_01

BO_02

BO_11

BO_01

BO_02

BO_11

BO_01

BO_02

BO_11

Co

ntro

lled

by fa

ult

de

tecto

r ele

me

nt

Sig

na

l Bin

ary

Ou

tpu

tS

ign

al B

ina

ry O

utp

ut

(op

tion

)*B

I plu

g-in

mo

du

le c

an

be

ind

ep

en

de

nt c

om

mo

n te

rmin

al

To

the

scre

en

of o

the

r co

axia

l

ca

ble

with

sin

gle

po

int e

arth

ing

1501

1502

1503

1504

…

1521

1522

BO_CtrlOpn1

BO_CtrlCls1

BO_Ctrl

Sig

na

l Bin

ary

Ou

tpu

t (op

tion

)

1519

1520BO_CtrlCls5

1517

1518BO_CtrlOpn5

Figure 6.2-1 Typical wiring of PCS-921 (conventional CT/VT)

6 Hardware


01

NR1301

PWR

09080705040302 P11312

NR1102

BOBIMON

NR1521NR1504

PCS-921 (conventional CT/VT and conventional binary input and binary output)

NET-

DSP

NR1136

PCS-921 (conventional CT/VT and GOOSE binary input and binary output)

NR1521

BO

NR1521

BO

06 10 11 14 15

NR1521

BO

Slot No.

Module ID

01

NR1301

PWR

09080705040302 P11312

NR1102

BIAI DSPMON

NR1504NR1161NR1401

06 10 11 14 15Slot No.

Module ID

BI

NR1504

AI

NR1401

DSP

NR1161

6.2.2 ECT/EVT (For reference only)

MO

N m

od

ule

DS

P m

od

ule

PW

R m

od

ule

01 04 05 P1

BI

mo

du

le

BO

mo

du

le

Slot No.02 03 08 09 10 11 12 14 15

NR1301

BO

mo

du

le

NR1521ANR1503NR1102 NR1161 NR1521C

13

NE

T-D

SP

Mo

du

le

07

NR1136D

SP

mo

du

le

06

NR1161

The following typical wiring is given based on above hardware configuration

6 Hardware


SV from

ECT/EVT

RX

P110

P111

P102

P103

P101

BO_FAIL

BO_ALM

P105

P106

P104

BO_FAIL

BO_ALM

P107

P108

Power

Supply

PWR+

PWR-

OPTO+

OPTO-

External DC power

supply

Power supply for

opto-coupler (24V)

COM

COM

Multiplex

RJ45 (Front)

…

0801

0802

+BI_01

-

PR

INT

ER

0101

0102

0103

0105

0106

0107SGND

RTS

TXD

SYN+

SYN-

SGND

Clo

ck S

YN

PR

INT

0104

0101

0102

0103

A

B

SGND

CO

M

0104

0803

0804

+BI_02

-

0805

0806

+BI_03

-

0821

0822

+BI_11

-

Phase A

Phase B

Phase CM

UTX

FO

inte

rface

for S

V c

ha

nn

el

Up

to 8

(LC

Typ

e)…

IRIG-B

*BI p

lug

-in m

od

ule

ca

n b

e c

om

mo

n n

eg

ativ

e

term

ina

l

To

the

scre

en

of o

the

r co

axia

l

ca

ble

with

sin

gle

po

int e

arth

ing

1101

1102

1103

1104

…

1121

1122

1201

1202

1203

1204

…

1221

1222

BO_01

BO_02

BO_11

BO_01

BO_02

BO_11

Co

ntro

lled

by fa

ult

de

tecto

r ele

me

nt

Sig

na

l Bin

ary

Ou

tpu

t

1501

1502

1503

1504

…

1521

1522

BO_CtrlOpn1

BO_CtrlCls1

BO_Ctrl

Sig

na

l Bin

ary

Ou

tpu

t (op

tion

)

1519

1520BO_CtrlCls5

1517

1518BO_CtrlOpn5

0225

P112

Grounding

Bus

Figure 6.2-2 Typical wiring of PCS-921 (ECT/EVT)

PCS-921 ECT/EVT, GOOSE binary input and binary output

01

NR1301

PWR

09080705040302 P11312

NR1102

DSP BIMON

06 10 11 14 15Slot No.

Module ID

NET-

DSP

NR1136 NR1504NR1161

PCS-921 ECT/EVT, conventional binary input and binary output

01

NR1301

PWR

09080705040302 P11312

NR1102

DSP BOBIMON BO BO

06 10 11 14 15Slot No.

Module ID

NET-

DSP

NR1136 NR1521NR1504NR1161 NR1521 NR1521 NR1521

BOBI

NR1504

6 Hardware


In the protection system adopting electronic current and voltage transformer (ECT/EVT), the

merging unit will merge the sample data from ECT/EVT, and then send it to the device through

multi-mode optical fibre. DSP module receives the data from merging unit through the optical-fibre

interface to complete the protection calculation and fault detector.

The difference between the hardware platform based on ECT/EVT and the hardware platform

based on conventional CT/VT lies in the receiving module of sampled values only, and the device

receives the sampled value from merging unit through multi-mode optical fibre.

6.2.3 CT Requirement

-Rated primary current Ipn:

According to the rated current or maximum load current of primary apparatus.

-Rated continuous thermal current Icth:

According to the maximum load current.

-Rated short-time thermal current Ith and rated dynamic current Idyn:

According to the maximum fault current.

-Rated secondary current Isn

-Accuracy limit factor Kalf:

Ipn Rated primary current (amps)

Icth Rated continuous thermal current (amps)

Ith Rated short-time thermal current (amps)

Idyn Rated dynamic current (amps)

Isn Rated secondary current (amps)

Kalf Accuracy limit factor ()Kalf=Ipal/Ipn

IPal Rated accuracy limit primary current (amps)

Performance verification

Esl > Esl′

Esl Rated secondary limiting e.m.f (volts)

Esl = kalf×Isn×(Rct+Rbn)

Kalf Accuracy limit factor (Kalf=Ipal/Ipn)

IPal Rated accuracy limit primary current (amps)



Rct Current transformer secondary winding resistance. (ohms)

Rbn Rated resistance burden (ohms)

Rbn=Sbn/Isn2

Sbn Rated burden (VAs)

Esl′ Required secondary limiting e.m.f (volts)

6 Hardware


Esl′ = k×Ipcf ×Isn×(Rct+Rb)/Ipn

k stability factor = 2

Ipcf Protective checking factor current (amps)

Same as the maximum prospective fault current


Rct Current transformer secondary winding resistance. (ohms)

Rb Real resistance burden (ohms)

Rb=Rr+2×RL+Rc

Rc Contact resistance, 0.05-0.1 ohm (ohms)

RL Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms)

Rr Impedance of relay phase current input (ohms)


For example:

1. Kalf=30, Isn=5A, Rct=1ohm, Sbn=60VA

Esl = kalf×Isn×(Rct+Rbn) = kalf×Isn×(Rct+ Sbn/ Isn2)

= 30×5×(1+60/25)=510V

2. Ipcf=40000A, RL=0.5ohm, Rr=0.1ohm, Rc=0.1ohm, Ipn=2000A

Esl′ = 2×Ipcf×Isn×(Rct+Rb)/Ipn

= 2×Ipcf ×Isn×(Rct+(Rr+2×RL+Rc))/Ipn

= 2×40000×5×(1+(0.1+2×0.5+0.1))/2000=440V

Thus, Esl > Esl′

6.3 Plug-in Module Description

The device consists of PWR plug-in module, MON plug-in module, DSP plug-in module, AI plug-in

module, BI plug-in module, BO plug-in module and NET-DSP plug-in module. Terminal definitions

and application of each plug-in module are introduced as follows.

6.3.1 PWR Plug-in Module (Power Supply)

PWR module is a DC/DC converter with electrical insulation between input and output. It has an

input voltage range as described in Chapter 2 “Technical Data”. The standardized output voltages

are +5V and +24V DC. The tolerances of the output voltages are continuously monitored.

The +5V DC output provides power supply for all the electrical elements that need +5V DC power

supply in this device.

The use of an external miniature circuit breaker is recommended. The miniature circuit breaker

must be in the on position when the device is in operation and in the off position when the device is

in cold reserve.

A 12-pin connector is fixed on PWR module. The terminal definition of the connector is described

6 Hardware


as below.

NR1301A

11

1

9

3

10

8

7

6

4

5

2

12

BO_COM1

OPTO+

PWR+

PWR-

GND

5V OK ALM

BO_ALM

BO_FAIL

BO_COM2

BO_FAIL

OPTO-

BO_ALM

BO_ALM

BO_FAIL

Figure 6.3-1 View of PWR plug-in module

The power switch in the dotted box of above figure maybe is not existed.

BO_FAIL

BO_ALM02

03

01

05

06

04BO_FAIL

BO_ALM

Figure 6.3-2 Output contacts of PWR plug-in module

Terminal definition and description is shown as follows:

Table 6.3-1 Terminal definition and description of PWR plug-in module

Terminal No. Symbol Description

01 BO_COM1 Common terminal 1

02 BO_FAIL Device failure output 1 (01-02, NC)

03 BO_ALM Device abnormality alarm output 1 (01-03, NO)

04 BO_COM2 Common terminal 2

05 BO_FAIL Device failure output 2 (04-05, NC)

6 Hardware



06 BO_ALM Device abnormality alarm output 2 (04-06, NO)

07 OPTO+ Positive power supply for BI module (24V)

08 OPTO- Negative power supply for BI module (24V)

09 Blank Not used

10 PWR+ Positive input of power supply for the device (250V/220V/125V/110V)

11 PWR- Negative input of power supply for the device (250V/220V/125V/110V)

12 GND Grounded connection of the power supply

NOTE!

The standard rated voltage of PWR module is self-adaptive to 88~300Vdc. If input voltage

is out of range, an alarm signal (Fail_Device) will be issued. For non-standard rated

voltage power supply module please specify when place order, and check if the rated

voltage of power supply module is the same as the voltage of power source before the

device being put into service.

PWR module provides terminal 12 and grounding screw for device grounding. Terminal 12

shall be connected to grounding screw and then connected to the earth copper bar of

panel via dedicated grounding wire.

Effective grounding is the most important measure for a device to prevent EMI, so effective

grounding must be ensured before the device is put into service.

PCS-921, like almost all electronic relays, contains electrolytic capacitors. These

capacitors are well known to be subject to deterioration over time if voltage is not applied

periodically. Deterioration can be avoided by powering the relays up once a year.

6.3.2 MON Plug-in Module (Monitor)

MON module consists of high-performance built-in processor, FLASH, SRAM, SDRAM, Ethernet

controller and other peripherals. Its functions include management of the complete device, human

machine interface, communication and waveform recording etc.

MON module uses the internal bus to receive the data from other modules of the device. It

communicates with the LCD module by RS-485 bus. This module comprises 100BaseT Ethernet

interfaces, RS-485 communication interfaces that exchange information with above system by

using IEC 61850, PPS/IRIG-B differential time synchronization interface and RS-232 printing

interface.

Modules with various combinations of memory and interface are available as shown in the table

below.

6 Hardware


NR1102A

ETHERNET

NR1102C

ETHERNET

NR1102B

ETHERNET

NR1102D

ETHERNET

NR1102H

ETHERNET

TX

RX

TX

RX

NR1102I

ETHERNET

TX

RX

TX

RX

NR1101E

ETHERNET

Figure 6.3-3 View of MON plug-in module

Module ID Memory Interface Terminal No. Usage Physical Layer

NR1102A 64M DDR

2 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA

Twisted pair wire RS-485

01 SYN+

To clock

synchronization

02 SYN-

03 SGND

04

RS-232

05 RTS

To printer Cable 06 TXD

07 SGND

NR1102B 64M DDR



01 SYN+

To clock

synchronization

02 SYN-

03 SGND

04

RS-232

05 RTS


07 SGND

NR1102C 128M DDR



01 SYN+

To clock

synchronization

02 SYN-

03 SGND

04

6 Hardware


RS-232

05 RTS


07 SGND

NR1102D 128M DDR



01 SYN+

To clock

synchronization

02 SYN-

03 SGND

04

RS-232

05 RTS


07 SGND

NR1102H 128M DDR

2 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA Twisted pair wire

2 FO Ethernet To SCADA Optical fibre SC

RS-485

01 SYN+

To clock

synchronization Twisted pair wire

02 SYN-

03 SGND

04

RS-232

05 RTS


07 SGND

NR1102I 128M DDR

2 RJ45 Ethernet To SCADA Twisted pair wire

2 FO Ethernet To SCADA Optical fibre ST

RS-485

01 SYN+

To clock

synchronization Twisted pair wire

02 SYN-

03 SGND

04

RS-232

05 RTS


07 SGND

NR1101E 128M DDR


Twisted pair wire

RS-485

01 A

To SCADA 02 B

03 SGND

04

RS-485

05 A

To SCADA 06 B

07 SGND

08

RS-485

09 SYN+

To clock

synchronization

10 SYN-

11 SGND

12

RS-232 13 RTS To printer Cable

6 Hardware


14 TXD

15 SGND

16

The correct connection is shown in Figure 6.3-4. Generally, the shielded cable with two pairs of

twisted pairs inside shall be applied. One pair of the twisted pairs are respectively used to connect

the “+” and “–” terminals of difference signal. The other pair of twisted pairs are used to connect

the signal ground of the communication interface. The module reserves a free terminal for all the

communication ports. The free terminal has no connection with any signal of the device, and it is

used to connect the external shields of the cable when connecting multiple devices in series. The

external shield of the cable shall be grounded at one of the ends only.

01

02

03

05

06

07SGND

RTS

TXD

SYN+

SYN-

SGND

04

01

02

03

485-1A

485-1B

SGND

04

Twisted pair wire

Twisted pair wire

Twisted pair wire

To

the

scre

en

of o

the

r co

axia

l

ca

ble

with

sin

gle

po

int e

arth

ing

CO

MP

RIN

TC

lock S

YN

Figure 6.3-4 Connection of communication terminal

6.3.3 AI Plug-in Module (Analog Input)

AI module is applicable for power plant or substation with conventional VT and CT. It is assigned to

slot numbers 02 and 03. However, the module is not required if the device is used with ECT/EVT.

For AI module, if the plug is not put in the socket, external CT circuit is closed itself. Just shown as

below.

SocketPlug

In

Out

plug is not put in the socket

6 Hardware


In

Out

Put the plug in the socket

Figure 6.3-5 Schematic diagram of CT circuit automatically closed

There are two types of AI module with rating 5 A or 1 A. Please declare which kind of AI module is

needed before ordering. Maximum linear range of the current converter is 40In.

Three phase currents (Ia, Ib and Ic) are input to AI module separately, terminal 01, 03 and 05 are

polarity marks. It is assumed that polarity mark of CT installed on line is at line side. Three phase

voltages (Ua, Ub, and Uc) are input to AI module, terminal 13, 15 and 17 are polarity marks.

0102

0304

0506

P1

P2

S1

S2

A

B

C

Figure 6.3-6 Current connection of AI plug-in module

6 Hardware


A

B

C

1413

1615

1817

2019

Figure 6.3-7 Voltage connection 1 of AI plug-in module

A

B

C

1413

1615

1817

2019

Figure 6.3-8 Voltage connection 2 of AI plug-in module

If the synchronism voltage need to be connected, there are two situations:

1. Without synchronism voltage switchover

The synchronism voltage can be connected to terminal 19 and 20 (terminal 19 is polarity mark).

6 Hardware


The synchronism voltage could be any phase-to-ground voltage or phase-to-phase voltage.

NR1401

Ia 01

Ib 03

Ic 05

07

09

11

Ua 13

Ub 15

Uc 17

Us 19

21

23

Ian 02

Ibn 04

Icn 06

08

10

12

Uan 14

Ubn 16

Ucn 18

Usn 20

22

24

Figure 6.3-9 View of AI plug-in module (without synchronism voltage switchover)

Table 6.3-2 lists the terminal number and definition of AI module.

Table 6.3-2 Terminal definition of AI module (without synchronism voltage switchover)

Terminal No. Definition Definition

01 Ia The current of A-phase (Polarity mark)

02 Ian The current of A-phase

03 Ib The current of B-phase (Polarity mark)

04 Ibn The current of B-phase

05 Ic The current of C-phase (Polarity mark)

06 Icn The current of C-phase

07 Reserved

08 Reserved

09 Reserved

10 Reserved

11 Reserved

12 Reserved

13 Ua The voltage of A-phase (Polarity mark)

14 Uan The voltage of A-phase

15 Ub The voltage of B-phase (Polarity mark)

16 Ubn The voltage of B-phase

17 Uc The voltage of C-phase (Polarity mark)

18 Ucn The voltage of C-phase

19 Us Synchronism voltage (Polarity mark)

6 Hardware



20 Usn Synchronism voltage

21 Reserved

22 Reserved

23 Reserved

24 Reserved

25 GND Ground

2. With synchronism voltage switchover

UB1, UB2 and UL2 are the synchronism voltage from bus VT and line VT used for synchrocheck, it

could be any phase-to-ground voltage or phase-to-phase voltage. The device can automatically

switch synchronism voltage according to auxiliary contact of CB position or DS position.

NR1401

Ia 01

Ib 03

Ic 05

07

09

11

Ua 13

Ub 15

Uc 17

UB1 19

21

23

Ian 02

Ibn 04

Icn 06

08

10

12

Uan 14

Ubn 16

Ucn 18

UB1n 20

22

24

UL2 UL2n

UB2 UB2n

Figure 6.3-10 View of AI plug-in module (with synchronism voltage switchover)

Table 6.3-3 lists the terminal number and definition of AI module.

Table 6.3-3 Terminal definition of AI module (with synchronism voltage switchover)


01 Ia The current of A-phase (Polarity mark)

02 Ian The current of A-phase

03 Ib The current of B-phase (Polarity mark)

04 Ibn The current of B-phase

05 Ic The current of C-phase (Polarity mark)

06 Icn The current of C-phase

07 Reserve

08 Reserve

6 Hardware



09 Reserve

10 Reserve

11 Reserve

12 Reserve

13 Ua The voltage of A-phase (Polarity mark)

14 Uan The voltage of A-phase

15 Ub The voltage of B-phase (Polarity mark)

16 Ubn The voltage of B-phase

17 Uc The voltage of C-phase (Polarity mark)

18 Ucn The voltage of C-phase

19 UB1 The voltage of bus 1 (Polarity mark)

20 UB1n The voltage of bus 1

21 UL2 The voltage of line 2 (Polarity mark)

22 UL2n The voltage of line 2

23 UB2 The voltage of bus 2 (Polarity mark)

24 UB2n The voltage of bus 2

25 GND Ground

If the auto-reclosing is enabled but synchronism check is not required, the synchronism voltage

should be disconnected.

6.3.4 DSP Plug-in Module (Logic Proces)

NR1161

Figure 6.3-11 View of DSP plug-in module

6 Hardware


This device can be equipped with 2 DSP plug-in modules at most and 1 DSP plug-in module at

least. The default DSP plug-in module is necessary, which mainly is responsible for protection

function including fault detector and protection calculation.

The module consists of high-performance double DSP (digital signal processor), 16-digit

high-accuracy ADC that can perform synchronous sampling and manage other peripherals. One

of double DSP is responsible for protection calculation, and can fulfill analog data acquisition,

protection logic calculation and tripping output. The other is responsible for fault detector, and can

fulfill analog data acquisition, fault detector and providing power supply to output relay.

When the module is connected with conventional CT/VT, it can perform the synchronous data

acquisition through AI plug-in module. When the module is connected with ECT/EVT, it can

receive the real-time synchronous sampled value from merging unit through NET-DSP plug-in

module.

The other module is optional and it is not required unless control and manual closing with

synchronism check are equppied with this device. The default DSP plug-in module is fixed at slot

04 and the option DSP plug-in module is fixed at slot 06.

6.3.5 NET-DSP Plug-in Module (GOOSE and SV)

NR1136A NR1136C

RX

Figure 6.3-12 View of NET-DSP plug-in module

This module consists of high-performance DSP (digital signal processor), 2~8 100Mbit/s

optical-fibre interface (LC type) and selectable IRIG-B interface (ST type). It supports GOOSE and

SV by IEC 61850-9-2 protocols. It can receive and send GOOSE messages to intelligent control

device, and receive SV from MU (merging unit).

6 Hardware


This module supports IEEE1588 network time protocol, E2E and P2P defined in IEEE1588

protocol can be selected.This module supports Ethernet IEEE802.3 time adjustment message

format, UDP time adjustment message format and GMRP.

6.3.6 BI Plug-in Module (Binary Input)

There are two kinds of BI modules available, NR1503 and NR1504. Up to 3 BI modules can be

equipped with one device. The rated voltage can be selected to be 24V/48V (NR1503D or

NR1504D) or 110V/220V/125V/250V (NR1503A or NR1504A).

Each BI module is with a 22-pin connector for 11 binary inputs (NR1503) or 18 binary inputs

(NR1504).

For NR1503, each binary input has independent negative power input of opto-coupler, and can be

configurable. The terminal definition of the connector of BI plug-in module is described as below.

[BI_n] (n=01, 02, …,11 can be configured as a specified binary input by PCS-Explorer software.)

NR1503

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

BI_01

BI_04

BI_05

BI_07

BI_08

BI_09

BI_10

BI_11

BI_06

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

BI_02

BI_03

Opto11-

Opto01-

Opto02-

Opto03-

Opto04-

Opto05-

Opto06-

Opto07-

Opto08-

Opto09-

Opto10-

Figure 6.3-13 View of BI plug-in module (NR1503)

Terminal description for NR 1503 is shown as follows.


01 BI_01 Configurable binary input 1

02 Opto01- Negative supply of configurable binary input 1





6 Hardware



















For NR1504, all binary inputs share one common negative power input, and is configurable. The

terminal definition of the connector of BI plug-in module is described as below. [BI_n] (n=01,

02,…,18 can be configured as a specified binary input by PCS-Explorer software.)

NR1504

Opto+

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

BI_01

BI_04

BI_05

BI_07

BI_08

BI_09

BI_10

BI_11

BI_06

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

BI_02

BI_03

COM-

BI_12

BI_13

BI_14

BI_15

BI_16

BI_17

BI_18

Figure 6.3-14 View of BI plug-in module (NR1504)

Terminal description for NR1504 is shown as follows.

6 Hardware



01 Opto+ Positive supply of power supply of the module







08 Blank Not used







15 Blank Not used







22 COM- Common terminal of negative supply of binary inputs

First four binary signals (BI_01, BI_02, BI_03, BI_04) in first BI plug-in module are fixed, they are

[BI_TimeSyn], [BI_Print], [BI_Maintenance] and [BI_RstTarg] respectively.

1. Binary input: [BI_TimeSyn]

It is used to receive clock synchronization signal from clock synchronization device, the binary

input [BI_TimeSyn] will change from “0” to “1” once pulse signal is received. When the device

adopts “Conventional” mode as clock synchronization mode (refer to section “Communication

Settings”), the device can receives PPM (pulse per minute) and PPS (pulse per second). If the

setting [Opt_TimeSyn] is set as other values, this binary input is invalid.

2. Binary input: [BI_Print]

It is used to manually trigger printing latest report when the equipment is configured as manual

printing mode by logic setting [En_AutoPrint]=0. The printer button is located on the panel usually.

If the equipment is configured as automatic printing mode ([En_AutoPrint]=1), report will be printed

automatically as soon as it is formed.

3. Binary input: [BI_Maintenance]

It is used to block communication export when this binary input is energized. During device

maintenance or testing, this binary input is then energized not to send reports via communication

port, local display and printing still work as usual. This binary input should be de-energized when

6 Hardware


the device is restored back to normal.

The application of the binary input [BI_Maintenance] for digital substation communication adopting

IEC61850 protocol is given as follows.

1) Processing mechanism for MMS (Manufacturing Message Specification) message

a) The protection device should send the state of this binary input to client.

b) When this binary input is energized, the bit “Test” of quality (Q) in the sent message changes

to “1”.

c) When this binary input is energized, the client cannot control the isolator link and circuit

breaker, modify settings and switch setting group remotely.

d) According to the value of the bit “Test” of quality (Q) in the message sent, the client

discriminate whether this message is maintenance message, and then deal with it correspondingly.

If the message is the maintenance message, the content of the message will not be displayed on

real-time message window, audio alarm not issued, but the picture is refreshed so as to ensure

that the state of the picture is in step with the actual state. The maintenance message will be

stored, and can be inquired, in independent window.

2) Processing mechanism for GOOSE message

a) When this binary input is energized, the bit “Test” in the GOOSE message sent by the

protection device changes to “1”.

b) For the receiving end of GOOSE message, it will compare the value of the bit “Test” in the

GOOSE message received by it with the state of its own binary input (i..e [BI_Maintenance]), the

message will be thought as invalid unless they are conformable.

3) Processing mechanism for SV (Sampling Value) message

a) When this binary input of merging unit is energized, the bit “Test” of quality (Q) of sampling

data in the SV message sent change “1”.

b) For the receiving end of SV message, if the value of bit “Test” of quality (Q) of sampling data

in the SV message received is “1”, the relevant protection functions will be disabled, but under

maintenance state, the protection device should calculate and display the magnitude of sampling

data.

c) For duplicated protection function configurations, all merging units of control module

configured to receive sampling should be also duplicated. Both dual protection devices and dual

merging units should be fully independent each other, and one of them is in maintenance state will

not affect the normal operation of the other.

4. Binary input: [BI_RstTarg]

It is used to reset latching signal relay and LCD displaying. The reset is done by pressing a button

on the panel.

6 Hardware


Note!

The rated voltage of binary input is optional: 24V, 48V, 110V, 125V, 220V or 250V, which

must be specified when placed order. It is necessary to check whether the rated voltage of

BI module complies with site DC supply rating before put the relay in service.

6.3.7 BO Plug-in Module (Binary Output)

NR1521A, NR1521C and NR1521F modules are three standard binary output modules. The

contacts provided by NR1521A, NR1521C and NR1521F are all normally open (NO) contacts.

Output contact can be configured as a specified tripping output contact and a signal output contact

respectively by PCS-Explorer software according to user requirement.

NR1521A can provide 11 output contacts controlled by fault detector.

NR1521A

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

BO_01

BO_02

BO_03

BO_04

BO_05

BO_06

BO_07

BO_08

BO_09

BO_10

BO_11

Figure 6.3-15 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521A)

NR1521C can provide 11 output contacts without controlled by fault detector.

6 Hardware


NR1521C

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

BO_01

BO_02

BO_03

BO_04

BO_05

BO_06

BO_07

BO_08

BO_09

BO_10

BO_11

Figure 6.3-16 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521C)

BO plug-in module (NR1521F) is dedicatedly for remote/manual open or closing to circuit breaker,

disconnector and earth switch. 5 pairs of binary outputs (one for open and the other for closing)

can be provided by this BO plug-in module configured in slot 15 if measurement and control

function is equipped with the device. Up to 10 pairs of binary outputs can be provided by two BO

plug-in modules that can be configured in slot 14 and 15 respectively. (BO plug-in module

configured in slot 14 is optional if open or closing contacts is not enough)

A normally open contact is presented via terminal 21-22 designated as ROS (i.e. remote operation

signal). Whenever any of binary output contacts for open or closing is closed, ROS contact will

close to issue a signal indicating that this device is undergoing a remote operation.

BO plug-in module (NR1521F) is displayed as shown in the following figure.

6 Hardware


NR1521F

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

BO_CtrlOpn01

BO_CtrlCls01

BO_CtrlOpn02

BO_CtrlCls02

BO_CtrlOpn03

BO_CtrlCls03

BO_CtrlOpn04

BO_CtrlCls04

BO_CtrlOpn05

BO_CtrlCls05

BO_Ctrl

Figure 6.3-17 View of BO plug-in module (NR1521F)

6.3.8 HMI Module

The display panel consists of liquid crystal display module, keyboard, LED and ARM processor.

The functions of ARM processor include display control of the liquid crystal display module,

keyboard processing, and exchanging data with the CPU through LAN port etc. The liquid crystal

display module is a high-performance grand liquid crystal panel with soft back lighting, which has a

user-friendly interface and an extensive display range.

6 Hardware


7 Settings


7 Settings

Table of Contents

7.1 Communication Settings ................................................................................ 7-1

7.1.1 Setting Description............................................................................................................... 7-2

7.1.2 Access Path ......................................................................................................................... 7-5

7.2 Device Settings ............................................................................................... 7-5


7.2.2 Access Path ......................................................................................................................... 7-6

7.3 System Settings .............................................................................................. 7-6


7.3.2 Access Path ......................................................................................................................... 7-7

7.4 Protection Settings ......................................................................................... 7-7


7.4.2 Access Path ....................................................................................................................... 7-12

7.5 Logic Link Settings ....................................................................................... 7-12

7.5.1 Setting Description............................................................................................................. 7-12

7.5.2 Access Path ....................................................................................................................... 7-13

7.6 Measurement and Control Settings ............................................................. 7-13

7.6.1 Setting Description............................................................................................................. 7-13

7.6.2 Access Path ....................................................................................................................... 7-15

List of Tables

Table 7.1-1 Communication settings ......................................................................................... 7-1

Table 7.2-1 Device settings ......................................................................................................... 7-5

Table 7.3-1 System settings ....................................................................................................... 7-6

7 Settings


7 Settings


The device has some setting groups for protection to coordinate with the mode of power system

operation, one of which is assigned to be active. However, equipment parameters are common for

all protection setting groups.

Note!

All current settings in this chapter are secondary current converted from primary current by

CT ratio. Zero-sequence current or voltage setting is configured according to 3I0 or 3U0

and negative sequence current setting according to I2 or U2.

7.1 Communication Settings

Table 7.1-1 Communication settings

No. Item Range

1 IP_LAN1 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255

2 Mask_LAN1 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255

3 IP_LAN2 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255

4 Mask_LAN2 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255

5 En_LAN2 0 or 1

6 IP_LAN3 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255

7 Mask_LAN3 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255

8 En_LAN3 0 or 1

9 IP_LAN4 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255

10 Mask_LAN4 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255

11 En_LAN4 0 or 1

12 Gateway 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255

13 En_Broadcast 0 or 1

14 Addr_RS485A 0~255

15 Baud_RS485A 4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200 (bps)

16 Protocol_RS485A 0, 1 or 2

17 Addr_RS485B 0~255

18 Baud_RS485B 4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200 (bps)

19 Protocol_RS485B 0, 1 or 2

20 Threshold_Measmt 0~100%

21 Period_Measmt 0~65535s

22 Format_Measmt 0, 1

23 Baud_Printer 4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200 (bps)

24 En_AutoPrint 0 or 1

25 Opt_TimeSyn

Conventional

SAS

Advanced

NoTImeSyn

7 Settings


No. Item Range

26 IP_Server_SNTP 000.000.000.000~255.255.255.255

27 OffsetHour_UTC -12~+12 (hrs)

28 OffsetMinute_UTC 0~60 (min)

7.1.1 Setting Description

1. IP_LAN1, IP_LAN2, IP_LAN3, IP_LAN4

IP address of Ethernet port 1, Ethernet port 2, Ethernet port 3 and Ethernet port 4

2. Mask_LAN1, Mask_LAN2, Mask_LAN3, Mask_LAN4

Subnet mask of Ethernet port 1, Ethernet port 2, Ethernet port 3 and Ethernet port 4

3. En_LAN2, En_LAN3, En_LAN4

Put Ethernet port 2, Ethernet port 3 and Ethernet port 4 in service

They are used for Ethernet communication based on the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol. When the IEC

61850 protocol is applied, the IP address of Ethernet A will be GOOSE source MAC address.

Ethernet port 1 is always in service by default.

4. Gateway

IP address of Gateway (router)

5. En_Broadcast

This setting is only used only for IEC 60870-5-103 protocol. If NR network IEC 60870-5-103

protocol is used, the setting must be set as “1”.

0: the device does not send UDP messages through network

1: the device sends UDP messages through network

6. Addr_RS485A, Addr_RS485B

They are the device′s communication address used to communicate with the SCADA or RTU via

serial ports (port A and port B).

7. Baud_RS485A, Baud_RS485B

Baud rate of rear RS-485 serial port A or B

8. Protocol_RS485A, Protocol_RS485B

Communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port A or B

0: IEC 60870-5-103 protocol

1: Modbus Protocol

2: Reserved

7 Settings


Note!

Above table listed all the communication settings, the device delivered to the user maybe

only show some settings of them according to the communication interface configuration.

If only the Ethernet ports are applied, the settings about the serial ports (port A and port B)

are not listed in this submenu. And the settings about the Ethernet ports only listed in this

submenu according to the actual number of Ethernet ports.

The standard arrangement of the Ethernet port is two, at most four (predetermined when

ordering). Set the IP address according to actual arrangement of Ethernet numbers and

the un-useful port/ports need not be configured. If PCS-Explorer configuration tool

auxiliary software is connected with this device through the Ethernet, the IP address of the

PCS-Explorer must be set as one of the available IP address of this device.

9. Threshold_Measmt

Threshold value of sending measurement values to SCADA through IEC 60870-5-103 or

IEC61850 protocol.

Default value: “1%”

10. Period_Measmt

The time period for equipment sends measurement data to SCADA through IEC 60870-5-103

protocol.

Default value: “60”

11. Format_Measmt

The setting is used to select the format of measurement data sent to SCADA through IEC

60870-5-103 protocol.

0: GDD data type through IEC103 protocol is 12

1: GDD data type through IEC103 protocol is 7, i.e. 754 short real number of IEEE standard

12. Baud_Printer

Baud rate of printer port

13. En_AutoPrint

If automatic print is required for fault report after protection operating, it is set as “1”. Otherwise, it

should be set to “0”.

14. Opt_TimeSyn

There are four selections for clock synchronization of device, shown as follows.

Conventional

PPS (RS-485): Pulse per second (PPS) via RS-485 differential level

7 Settings


IRIG-B (RS-485): IRIG-B via RS-485 differential level

PPM (DIN): Pulse per minute (PPM) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn]

PPS (DIN): Pulse per second (PPS) via the binary input [BI_TimeSyn]

SAS

SNTP (PTP): Unicast (point-to-point) SNTP mode via Ethernet network

SNTP (BC): Broadcast SNTP mode via Ethernet network

Message (IEC103): Clock messages through IEC103 protocol

Advanced

IEEE1588: Clock message via IEEE1588

IRIG-B (Fiber): IRIG-B via optical-fibre interface

PPS (Fiber) PPS: Pulse per second (PPS) via optical-fibre interface

NoTimeSync

When no time synchronization signal is connected to the device, please select this option and the

alarm message [Alm_TimeSyn] will not be issued anymore.

“Conventional” mode and “SAS” mode are always be supported by the device, but “Advanced”

mode is only supported when NET-DSP module is equipped. The alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn]

may be issued to remind user loss of time synchronization signals.

1) When “SAS” is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization signal, the device

will not send the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn]. When “Conventional” mode is selected, if there

is no conventional clock synchronization signal, “SAS” mode will be enabled automatically

with the alarm signal [Alm_TimeSyn] issued simultaneously.

2) When “Advanced” mode is selected, if there is no conventional clock synchronization signal

connected to NET-DSP module, “SAS” mode is enabled automatically with the alarm signal

[Alm_TimeSyn] issued simultaneously.

3) When “NoTimeSyn” mode is selected, the device will not send alarm signals without time

synchronization signal. But the device can be still synchronized if receiving time

synchronization signal.

Note!

The clock message via IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is invalid when the device receives the

IRIG-B signal through RCS-485 port.

15. IP_Server_SNTP

It is the address of the SNTP time synchronization server which sends SNTP timing messages to

the relay or BCU.

7 Settings


16. OffsetHour_UTC, OffsetMinute_UTC

If the IEC61850 protocol is adopted in substations, the time tags of communication messages are

required according to UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) time.

The setting [OffsetHour_UTC] is used to set the hour offset of the current time zone to the GMT

(Greenwich Mean Time) zone; for example, if a relay is applied in China, the time zone of China is

east 8th time zone, so this setting is set as “8”. The setting [OffsetMinute_UTC] is used to set the

minute offset of the current time zone to the GMT zone.

Time zone GMT zone East 1st East 2

nd East 3

rd East 4

th East 5

th

Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5

Time zone East 6th East 7

th East 8

th East 9

th East 10

th East 11

th

Setting 6 7 8 9 10 11

Time zone East/West 12th West 1

st West 2

nd West 3

rd West 4

th West 5

th

Setting 12/-12 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5

Time zone West 6th West 7

th West 8

th West 9

th West 10

th West 11

th

Setting -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11

7.1.2 Access Path

MainMenuSettingsDevice SetupComm Settings

7.2 Device Settings

Table 7.2-1 Device settings

No. Item Range

1 HDR_EncodedMode GB18030, UTF-8

2 Opt_Caption_103 0, 1 or 2

3 Bxx.Un_BinaryInput 24V, 30V, 48V, 110V, 125V, 220V


1. HDR_EncodedMode

Select encoding format of header (HDR) file COMTRADE recording file

Default value is “UTF-8”.

2. Opt_Caption_103

Select the caption language sent to SAS via IEC103 protocol

0: Current language

1: Fixed Chinese

2: Fixed English

Default value of [Opt_Caption_103] is 0 (i.e. current language), and please set it to 1 (i.e. Fixed

Chinese) if the SAS is supplied by China Manufacturer.

7 Settings


3. Bxx.Un_BinaryInput

This setting is used to set voltage level of binary input module. If low-voltage BI module is

equipped, 24V, 30V or 48V can be set according to the actual requirement, and if high-voltage BI

module is equipped, 110V, 125V or 220V can be set according to the actual requirement.

Bxx: this plug-in module is inserted in slot xx.

7.2.2 Access Path

MainMenuSettingsDevice SetupDevice Settings

7.3 System Settings

Table 7.3-1 System settings

No. Item Range Unit

1 Active_Grp 1~10

2 Opt_SysFreq 50 or 60 Hz

3 PrimaryEquip_Name Maximum 12 character

4 U1n 33.00~65500.00 kV

5 U2n 80.00~220.00 V

6 I1n 100~65500 A

7 I2n 1 or 5 A

8 f_High_FreqAlm 50~65 Hz

9 f_Low_FreqAlm 45~60 Hz


1. Active_Grp

The number of active setting group, 10 setting groups can be configured for protection settings,

and only one is active at a time.

2. PrimaryEquip_Name

It is recognized by the device automatically. Such setting is used for printing messages.

3. Opt_SysFreq

It is option of system frequency, and can be set as 50Hz or 60Hz.

4. Un1

Primary rated voltage of VT;

5. Un2

Secondary rated voltage of VT;

6. In1

7 Settings


Primary rated current of CT;

7. In2

Secondary rated current of CT;

8. f_High_FreqAlm

Frequency upper limit setting. The device will issue an alarm [Alm_Freq], when system frequency

is higher than the setting.

9. f_Low_FreqAlm

Frequency lower limit setting. The device will issue an alarm [Alm_Freq], when system frequency

is lower than the setting.

7.3.2 Access Path

MainMenuSettingsSystem Settings

7.4 Protection Settings

All settings of protection are based on secondary ratings of VT and CT. For the specific project,

some settings relevant to synchrocheck module, auto-reclosing module and breaker failure

protection module maybe with the suffix of “_CB1” and “_CB2” what represent the settings

correspond to synchrocheck module, auto-reclosing module and breaker failure protection module

for circuit breaker 1 and circuit breaker 2 respectively.

Unn: rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage.

Un: rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage.

In: rated secondary current.


7.4.1.1 Fault Detector Settings (FD)

No. Item Remark Range

1 FD.DPFC.I_Set Current setting of DPFC current FD element (0.050~30.000)×In (A)

2 FD.ROC.3I0_Set Current setting of neutral current FD element (0.050~30.000)×In (A)

7.4.1.2 Auxiliary Element (Aux.E)


1 AuxE.OCD.t_DDO Extended time delay of current change auxiliary

element 0.000~10.000 (s)

2 AuxE.OCD.En Enabling/disabling current change auxiliary element 0 or 1

3 AuxE.ROC1.3I0_Set Current setting of stage 1 residual current auxiliary

element (0.050~30.000)×In

4 AuxE.ROC1.En Enabling/disabling stage 1 residual current auxiliary

element 0 or 1

7 Settings



element (0.050~30.000)×In


element 0 or 1


element (0.050~30.000)×In


element 0 or 1

9 AuxE.OC1.I_Set Current setting of stage 1 phase current auxiliary

element (0.050~30.000)×In

10 AuxE.OC1.En Enabling/disabling stage 1 phase current auxiliary

element 0 or 1


element (0.050~30.000)×In


element 0 or 1


element (0.050~30.000)×In


element 0 or 1

15 AuxE.UVD.U_Set Voltage setting for voltage change auxiliary element 0~Un

16 AuxE.UVD.t_DDO Extended time delay of voltage change auxiliary

element 0.000~10.000 (s)

17 AuxE.UVD.En Enabling/disabling voltage change auxiliary element 0 or 1

18 AuxE.UVG.U_Set Voltage setting for phase-to-ground under voltage

auxiliary element 0~Un

19 AuxE.UVG.En Enabling/disabling phase-to-ground under voltage

auxiliary element 0 or 1

20 AuxE.UVS.U_Set Voltage setting for phase-to-phase under voltage

auxiliary element 0~Unn

21 AuxE.UVS.En Enabling/disabling phase-to-phase under voltage

auxiliary element 0 or 1

22 AuxE.ROV.3U0_Set Voltage setting for residual voltage auxiliary element 0~Un

23 AuxE.ROV.En Enabling/disabling residual voltage auxiliary element 0 or 1

7.4.1.3 Phase Overcurrent Protection (50/51P)


1 50/51P.K_Hm2 Setting of second harmonic component for blocking

phase overcurrent elements 0.000~1.000

2 50/51P1.I_Set Current setting for stage 1 of phase overcurrent

protection (0.050~30.000)×In (A)

3 50/51P1.t_Op Time delay for stage 1 of phase overcurrent

protection 0.000~20.000 (s)

7 Settings


4 50/51P1.En Enable stage 1 of phase overcurrent protection 0 or 1

5 50/51P1.En_Hm2_Blk Enable second harmonic blocking for stage 1 of

phase overcurrent protection 0 or 1

6 50/51P2.I_Set Current setting for stage 2 of phase overcurrent

protection (0.050~30.000)×In (A)

7 50/51P2.t_Op Time delay for stage 2 of phase overcurrent

protection 0.000~20.000 (s)

8 50/51P2.En Enable stage 2 of phase overcurrent protection 0 or 1

9 50/51P2.En_Hm2_Blk Enable second harmonic blocking for stage 2 of

phase overcurrent protection 0 or 1

7.4.1.4 Earth Fault Protection Settings (50/51G)


1 50/51G.K_Hm2_Blk Setting of second harmonic component for blocking

earth fault elements 0.000~1.000

2 50/51G1.3I0_Set Current setting for stage 1 of earth fault protection (0.050~30.000)×In (A)

3 50/51G1.t_Op Time delay for stage 1 of earth fault protection 0.000~20.000 (s)

4 50/51G1.En Enable stage 1 of earth fault protection 0 or 1

5 50/51G1.En_Hm2 Enable second harmonic blocking for stage 1 of

earth fault protection 0 or 1

6 50/51G2.3I0_Set Current setting for stage 2 of earth fault protection (0.050~30.000)×In (A)

7 50/51G2.t_Op Time delay for stage 2 of earth fault protection 0.000~20.000 (s)

8 50/51G2.En Enable stage 2 of earth fault protection 0 or 1

9 50/51G2.En_Hm2_Blk Enable second harmonic blocking for stage 2 of

earth fault protection 0 or 1

7.4.1.5 Dead Zone Protection (50DZ)

No. Name Remark Range

1 50DZ.I_Set Current setting of dead zone protection (0.050~30.000)×In (A)

2 50DZ.t_Op Time delay of dead zone protection 0.000~10.000 (s)

3 50DZ.En Enable dead zone protection 0 or 1

7.4.1.6 Breaker Failure Protection Settings (50BF)


1 50BF.I_Set Current setting of phase current criterion for BFP (0.050~30.000 )×In (A)

2 50BF.3I0_Set Current setting of zero-sequence current criterion

for BFP (0.050~30.000 )×In (A)

3 50BF.I2_Set Current setting of negative-sequence current

criterion for BFP (0.050~30.000 )×In (A)

4 50BF.t_ReTrp Time delay of re-tripping for BFP 0.000~10.000 (s)

5 50BF.t1_Op Time delay of stage 1 for BFP 0.000~10.000 (s)

6 50BF.t2_Op Time delay of stage 2 for BFP 0.000~10.000 (s)

7 50BF.En Enable breaker failure protection 0 or 1

7 Settings


8 50BF.En_ReTrp Enable re-trip function for BFP 0 or 1

9 50BF.En_3I0_1P Enable zero-sequence current criterion for BFP

initiated by single-phase tripping contact 0 or 1

10 50BF.En_3I0_3P Enable zero-sequence current criterion for BFP

initiated by three-phase tripping contact 0 or 1

11 50BF.En_I2_3P Enable negative-sequence current criterion for BFP

initiated by three-phase tripping contact 0 or 1

12 50BF.En_CB_Ctrl Enable breaker failure protection can be initiated by

normally closed contact of circuit breaker 0 or 1

7.4.1.7 Pole Discrepancy Protection Settings (62PD)


1 62PD.3I0_Set Current setting of residual current criterion for pole

discrepancy protection (0.050~30.000 )×In (A)

2 62PD.I2_Set Current setting of negative-sequence current

criterion for pole discrepancy protection (0.050~30.000 )×In (A)

3 62PD.t_Op Time delay of pole discrepancy protection 0.000~600.000 (s)

4 62PD.En Enable pole discrepancy protection 0 or 1

5 62PD.En_3I0/I2_Ctrl

Enable residual current criterion and

negative-sequence current criterion for pole


0 or 1

7.4.1.8 Synchrocheck Settings (25)


1 25.Opt_Source_UL Voltage selecting mode of line 0~5

2 25.Opt_Source_UB Voltage selecting mode of bus 0~5

3 25.U_Dd Voltage threshold of dead check 0.05Un~0.8Un (V)

4 25.U_Lv Voltage threshold of live check 0.5Un~Un (V)

5 25.K_Usyn Compensation coefficient for synchronism voltage 0.20-5.00

6 25.phi_Diff Phase difference limit of synchronism check for AR 0~ 89 (Deg)

7 25.phi_Comp Compensation for phase difference between two

synchronous voltages 0~359 (Deg)

8 25.f_Diff Frequency difference limit of synchronism check for AR 0.02~1.00 (Hz)

9 25.U_Diff Voltage difference limit of synchronism check for AR 0.02Un~0.8Un (V)

10 25.t_DeadChk Time delay to confirm dead check condition 0.010~25.000 (s)

11 25.t_SynChk Time delay to confirm synchronism check condition 0.010~25.000 (s)

12 25.En_fDiffChk Enable frequency difference check 0 or 1

13 25.En_SynChk Enable synchronism check 0 or 1

14 25.En_DdL_DdB Enable dead line and dead bus (DLDB) check 0 or 1

15 25.En_DdL_LvB Enable dead line and live bus (DLLB) check 0 or 1

16 25.En_LvL_DdB Enable live line and dead bus (LLDB) check 0 or 1

17 25.En_NoChk Enable AR without any check 0 or 1

7 Settings


7.4.1.9 Auto-reclosing Settings (79)


1 79.N_Rcls Maximum number of reclosing attempts 1~4

2 79.t_Dd_1PS1 Dead time of first shot 1-pole reclosing 0.000~600.000 (s)

3 79.t_Dd_3PS1 Dead time of first shot 3-pole reclosing 0.000~600.000 (s)

4 79.t_Dd_3PS2 Dead time of second shot 3-pole reclosing 0.000~600.000 (s)

5 79.t_Dd_3PS3 Dead time of third shot 3-pole reclosing 0.000~600.000 (s)

6 79.t_Dd_3PS4 Dead time of fourth shot 3-pole reclosing 0.000~600.000 (s)

7 79.t_CBClsd Time delay of circuit breaker in closed position before

reclosing 0.000~600.000 (s)

8 79.t_CBReady

Time delay to wait for CB healthy, and begin to timing

when the input signal [79.CB_Healthy] is de-energized

and if it is not energized within this time delay, AR will

be blocked.

0.000~600.000 (s)

9 79.t_Wait_Chk Maximum wait time for synchronism check 0.000~600.000 (s)

10 79.t_Fail Time delay allow for CB status change to conform

reclosing successful 0.000~600.000 (s)

11 79.t_DDO_AR Pulse width of AR closing signal 0.000~600.000 (s)

12 79.t_Reclaim Reclaim time of AR 0.000~600.000 (s)

13 79.t_PersistTrp Time delay of excessive trip signal to block

auto-reclosing 0.000~600.000 (s)

14 79.t_DDO_BlkAR

Drop-off time delay of blocking AR, when blocking

signal for AR disappears, AR blocking condition drops

off after this time delay

0.000~600.000 (s)

15 79.t_AddDly Additional time delay for auto-reclosing 0.000~600.000 (s)

16 79.t_WaitMaster Maximum wait time for reclosing permissive signal from

master AR 0.000~600.000 (s)

17 79.t_SecFault

Time delay of discriminating another fault, and begin to

times after 1-pole AR initiated, 3-pole AR will be

initiated if another fault happens during this time delay.

AR will be blocked if another fault happens after that.

0.000~600.000 (s)

18 79.En_PDF_Blk Enable auto-reclosing blocked when a fault occurs

under pole disagreement condition 0 or 1

19 79.En_AddDly Enable auto-reclosing with an additional dead time

delay 0 or 1

20 79.En_CutPulse Enable adjust the length of reclosing pulse 0 or 1

21 79.En_FailCheck Enable confirm whether AR is successful by checking

CB state 0 or 1

22 79.En Enable auto-reclosing 0 or 1

23 79.En_ExtCtrl Enable AR by external input signal besides logic setting

[79.En] 0 or 1

24 79.En_CBInit Enable AR be initiated by open state of circuit breaker 0 or 1

7 Settings


25 79.Opt_Priority Option of AR priority 0, 1 or 2

26 79.SetOpt Control option of AR mode 0 or 1

27 79.En_1PAR Enable 1-pole AR mode 0 or 1

28 79.En_3PAR Enable 3-pole AR mode 0 or 1

29 79.En_1P/3PAR Enable 1/3-pole AR mode 0 or 1

7.4.1.10 Trip Logic Settings


1 t_DDO_Trp The dwell time of tripping command 0.000~10.000 (s)

7.4.1.11 VTS Settings


1 VTS.t_DPU Pick-up time delay of VT circuit supervision 0.200~100.000 (s)

2 VTS.t_DDO Drop-off time delay of VT circuit supervision 0.200~100.000 (s)

3 VTS. En_Out_VT VT is not connected to the protection device 0 or 1

4 VTS.En_LineVT

If three-phase voltage used for protection measurement

comes from line side (for example, 3/2 breaker), it

should be set as “1”. If three-phase voltage comes from

busbar side, it should be set as “0”.

0 or 1

5 VTS.En Enable alarm function of VT circuit supervision 0 or 1

7.4.2 Access Path

MainMenuSettingsProt Settings

7.5 Logic Link Settings

The logic link settings (in the submenu “Logic Links”) are used to determine whether the relevant

function of this device is enabled or disabled. If this device supports the logic link function, it will

have a corresponding submenu in the submenu “Logic Links” for the logic link settings.

Each logic link settings is an “AND” condition of enabling the relevant function with the

corresponding binary input and logic setting. Through SAS or RTU, logic link settings can be set

as “1” or “0”; and it means that the relevant function can be in service or out of service through

remote command. It provides convenience for operation management.


7.5.1.1 GOOSE Link Settings

The GOOSE link settings (in the submenu “GOOSE Links”) are used to determine whether the

relevant GOOSE elements are enabled or disabled. See the GOOSE related instruction manual

for the more information and details.

7.5.1.2 Spare Link Settings

The spare link settings (in the submenu “Function Links”) are used for future application. It can

be defined as one of above three link settings through the PCS-Explorer configuration tool.

7 Settings



1 Link_01 Spare link setting 01 0 or 1








7.5.2 Access Path

MainMenuSettingsLogic Links

7.6 Measurement and Control Settings


7.6.1.1 Synchronism Settings

Parameters in the “Syn Settings” menu are listed in the following table.


1 MCBrd.25.Opt_Source_UL Voltage selecting mode of line

0~5

(0: Ua; 1: Ub;

2: Uc; 3: Uab;

4: Ubc; 5: Uca)

2 MCBrd.25.Opt_Source_UB Voltage selecting mode of bus

0~5

(0: Ua; 1: Ub;

2: Uc; 3: Uab;

4: Ubc; 5: Uca)

3 MCBrd.25.U_Dd Voltage threshold of dead check 1.000~100.000 (V)

4 MCBrd.25.U_Lv Voltage threshold of live check 1.000~100.000 (V)

5 MCBrd.25.K_Usyn Compensation coefficient for synchronism voltage 0.20-5.00

6 MCBrd.25.phi_Diff Phase difference limit of synchronism check for AR 0.10~ 180.00 (Deg)

7 MCBrd.25.phi_Comp Compensation for phase difference between two

synchronous voltages 0~360 (Deg)

8 MCBrd.25.f_Diff Frequency difference limit of synchronism check for

AR 0.00~3.00 (Hz)

9 MCBrd.25.U_Diff Voltage difference limit of synchronism check for AR 1.000~100.000 (V)

10 MCBrd.25.En_SynChk Enable synchronism check 0 or 1

11 MCBrd.25.En_DdL_DdB Enable dead line and dead bus (DLDB) check 0 or 1

12 MCBrd.25.En_DdL_LvB Enable dead line and live bus (DLLB) check 0 or 1

13 MCBrd.25.En_LvL_DdB Enable live line and dead bus (LLDB) check 0 or 1

7 Settings


14 MCBrd.25.En_NoChk Enable AR without any check 0 or 1

15 MCBrd.25.df/dt Threshold of rate of frequency change between both

sides of CB for synchronism-check. 0.10~5.00 (Hz/s)

16 MCBrd.25.t_Close_CB

Circuit breaker closing time. It is the time from

receiving closing command pulse till the CB is

completely closed.

0~1000 (ms)

17 MCBrd.25.t_Wait_Chk

From receiving a closing command, this device will

continuously check whether between incoming

voltage and reference voltage involved in

synchronism check (or dead check) can meet the

criteria. If the synchronism check (or dead check)

criteria are not met within the duration of this time

delay, the failure of synchronism-check (or dead

check) will be confirmed.

5.000~30.000 (s)

7.6.1.2 Dual Point Binary Input Settings

Parameters in the “DPos Settings” menu are listed in the following table.


1 t_DPU_Dposxx

These settings are applied to configure the debouncing

time. “DPU” is the abbreviation of “Delay Pick Up”.

(xx=01, 02….)

0~60000 (ms)

Thses settings are applied to configure the status change confirmation time for No.xx double point

binary inputs. Up to 10 virtual double point binary inputs are provided in this device.

If a double point binary input changes from normal status to invalid status, i.e.: double point error

occurs, [t_DPU_Dposxx] will be applied as the debouncing time for No.xx double point binary

input.

7.6.1.3 Control Settings

Parameters in the “Control Settings” menu are listed in the following table. (xx=01, 02….10)


1 t_DDO_Opnxx No.xx holding time of a normal open contact of remote

opening CB, disconnector or for signaling purpose. 0~60000 (ms)

2 t_DDO_Clsxx No.xx closing time of a normal open contact of remote

closing CB, disconnector or for signaling purpose. 0~60000 (ms)

7.6.1.4 Interlock Settings

Parameters in the “Interlock Settings” menu are listed in the following table. (xx=01, 02….10)


1 En_Opnxx_Blk Enable No.xx open output of the BO module be controlled

by the interlocking logic 0 or 1

7 Settings



2 En_Clsxx_Blk Enable No.xx closing output of the BO module be

controlled by the interlocking logic 0 or 1

7.6.2 Access Path

MainMenuSettingsMon/Ctrl Settings

7 Settings





Table of Contents

8.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1.1 Keypad Operation ................................................................................................................ 8-2

8.1.2 LED Indications .................................................................................................................... 8-3

8.1.3 Front Communication Port ................................................................................................... 8-3

8.1.4 Ethernet Port Setup ............................................................................................................. 8-4

8.2 Menu Tree ........................................................................................................ 8-5

8.2.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 8-5

8.2.2 Main Menus ......................................................................................................................... 8-6

8.2.3 Sub Menus ........................................................................................................................... 8-7

8.3 LCD Display ................................................................................................... 8-17

8.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 8-17

8.3.2 Normal Display .................................................................................................................. 8-18

8.3.3 Display Disturbance Records ............................................................................................ 8-19

8.3.4 Display Supervision Event ................................................................................................. 8-20

8.3.5 Display IO Events .............................................................................................................. 8-21

8.3.6 Display Device Logs .......................................................................................................... 8-22

8.4 Keypad Operation ......................................................................................... 8-23

8.4.1 View Device Measurements .............................................................................................. 8-23

8.4.2 View Device Status ............................................................................................................ 8-23

8.4.3 View Device Records......................................................................................................... 8-23

8.4.4 Print Device Report ........................................................................................................... 8-24

8.4.5 View Device Setting ........................................................................................................... 8-25

8.4.6 Modify Device Setting ........................................................................................................ 8-25

8.4.7 Copy Device Setting .......................................................................................................... 8-28

8.4.8 Switch Setting Group ......................................................................................................... 8-28



8.4.9 Delete Device Records ...................................................................................................... 8-29

8.4.10 Remote Control ................................................................................................................ 8-30

8.4.11 Modify Device Clock ........................................................................................................ 8-33

8.4.12 View Module Information ................................................................................................. 8-34

8.4.13 Check Software Version .................................................................................................. 8-34

8.4.14 Communication Test ........................................................................................................ 8-34

8.4.15 Select Language .............................................................................................................. 8-35

List of Figures

Figure 8.1-1 Front panel .............................................................................................................. 8-1

Figure 8.1-2 Keypad buttons ...................................................................................................... 8-2

Figure 8.1-3 LED indications ...................................................................................................... 8-3

Figure 8.1-4 Corresponding cable of the RJ45 port in the front panel .................................. 8-4

Figure 8.1-5 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102C ................................................... 8-5

Figure 8.2-1 Menu tree ................................................................................................................ 8-7

List of Tables

Table 8.1-1 Definition of the 8-core cable ................................................................................. 8-4

Table 8.3-1 Tripping report messages ..................................................................................... 8-20

Table 8.3-2 User operating event list ....................................................................................... 8-22



The operator can access the protective device from the front panel. Local communication with the

protective device is possible using a computer via a multiplex RJ45 port on the front panel.

Furthermore, remote communication is also possible using a PC with the substation automation

system via rear RS485 port or rear Ethernet port. The operator is able to check the protective

device status at any time.

This chapter describes human machine interface (HMI), and give operator an instruction about

how to display or print event report, setting and so on through HMI menu tree and display metering

value, including r.m.s. current, voltage and frequency etc. through LCD. Procedures to change

active setting group or a settable parameter value through keypad is also described in details.

NOTE!

About three measurements in menu “Measurements”, please refer to the following

description:

“Measurement1” is use to display measured values from protection calculation DSP

(displayed in secondary value)

“Measurement2” is used to display measured values from fault detector DSP (displayed

in secondary value)

“Measurement3” is used to display measured primary values and other calculated

quantities

8.1 Overview

The human-machine interface consists of a human-machine interface (HMI) module which allows

a communication to be as simple as possible for the user. The HMI module helps to draw your

attention to something that has occurred which may activate a LED or a report displayed on the

LCD. Operator can locate the data of interest by navigating the keypad.

1

2

3

4

5

ENT

ES

CG

RP

PCS-9 211

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

HEALTHY

ALARM BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION

Figure 8.1-1 Front panel

The function of HMI module:



No. Item Description

1 LCD

A 320×240 dot matrix backlight LCD display is visible in dim lighting

conditions. The corresponding messages are displayed when there is

operation implemented.

2 LED

20 status indication LEDs, 2 LEDs are fixed as the signals of “HEALTHY”

(green) and “ALARM” (yellow), 18 LEDs are configurable with selectable

color among green, yellow and red.

3 Keypad Navigation keypad and command keys for full access to device

4 Communication port A multiplex RJ45 port for local communication with a PC

5 Logo Type and designation and manufacturer of device

8.1.1 Keypad Operation

ENT

GR

P

ES

C

Figure 8.1-2 Keypad buttons

1. “ESC”:

Cancel the operation

Quit the current menu

2. “ENT”:

Execute the operation

Confirm the interface

3. “GRP”

Activate the switching interface of setting group

4. leftward and rightward direction keys (“◄” and “►”):

Move the cursor horizontally

Enter the next menu or return to the previous menu

5. upward and downward direction keys (“▲” and “▼”)

Move the cursor vertically

Select command menu within the same level of menu

6. plus and minus sign keys (“＋” and “－”)

Modify the value



Modify and display the message number

Page up/down

8.1.2 LED Indications

HEALTHY

ALARM

Figure 8.1-3 LED indications

A brief explanation has been made as bellow.

LED Display Description

HEALTHY

Off When the equipment is out of service or any hardware error is defected during

self-check.

Steady Green Lit when the equipment is in service and ready for operation.

ALARM

Off When equipment in normal operating condition.

Steady Yellow Lit when VT circuit failure, CT circuit failure or other abnormal alarm is issued.

NOTE!

“HEALTHY” LED can only be turned on by energizing the device and no abnormality

detected.

“ALARM” LED is turned on when abnormalities of device occurs like above mentioned

and can be turned off after abnormalities are removed except alarm report [CTS.Alm]

which can only be reset only when the failure is removed and the device is rebooted or

re-energized.

Other LED indicators with no labels are configurable and user can configure them to be lit

by signals of operation element, alarm element and binary output contact according to

requirement through PCS-Explorer software, but as drawn in figure, 2 LEDs are fixed as

the signals of “HEALTHY” (green) and “ALARM” (yellow), 18 LEDs are configurable with

selectable color among green, yellow and red.

8.1.3 Front Communication Port

There is a multiplex RJ45 port on the front panel. This port can be used as an RS-232 serial port



as well as a twisted-pair Ethernet port. As shown in the following figure, a customized cable is

applied for debugging via this multiplex RJ45 port.

Figure 8.1-4 Corresponding cable of the RJ45 port in the front panel

In the above figure and the following table:

P1: To connect the multiplex RJ45 port. An 8-core cable is applied here.

P2: To connect the twisted-pair Ethernet port of the computer.

P3: To connect the RS-232 serial port of the computer.

The definition of the 8-core cable in the above figure is introduced in the following table.

Table 8.1-1 Definition of the 8-core cable

Terminal

No. Core color Function

Device side

(Left)

Computer side

(Right)

1 Orange TX+ of the Ethernet port P1-1 P2-1

2 Orange & white TX- of the Ethernet port P1-2 P2-2

3 Green & white RX+ of the Ethernet port P1-3 P2-3

4 Blue TXD of the RS-232 serial port P1-4 P3-2

5 Brown & white RXD of the RS-232 serial port P1-5 P3-3

6 Green RX- for the Ethernet port P1-6 P2-6

7 Blue & white The ground connection of the RS-232 port. P1-7 P3-5

8.1.4 Ethernet Port Setup

MON plug-in module is equipped with two or four 100Base-TX Ethernet interface, take NR1102C

as an example, as shown in Figure 8.1-5. Its rear view and the definition of terminals.

The Ethernet port can be used to communication with PC via auxiliary software (PCS-Explorer)

after connecting the protection device with PC, so as to fulfill on-line function (please refer to the

instruction manual of PCS-Explorer). At first, the connection between the protection device and PC

must be established. Through setting the IP address and subnet mask of corresponding Ethernet

interface in the menu “Settings→Device Setup→Comm Settings”, it should be ensured that the

protection device and PC are in the same network segment. For example, setting the IP address

and subnet mask of network A. (using network A to connect with PC)



PC: IP address is set as “198.87.96.102”, subnet mask is set as “255.255.255.0”

The IP address and subnet mask of protection device should be [IP_LAN1]= 198.87.96.XXX,

[Mask_LAN1]=255.255.255.0, [En_LAN1]=1. (XXX can be any value from 0 to 255 except 102)

If the logic setting [En_LAN1] is non-available, it means that network A is always enabled.

NR1102C

ETHERNET

Network A

Network B

SYN+

SYN-

SGND

GND

RTS

TXD

SGND

Figure 8.1-5 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102C

NOTE!

If using other Ethernet port, for example, Ethernet B, the logic setting [En_LAN2] must be

set as “1”.

8.2 Menu Tree

8.2.1 Overview

Press “▲” of any running interface and enter the main menu. Select different submenu by “▲” and

“▼”. Enter the selected submenu by pressing “ENT” or “►”. Press “◄” and return to the previous

menu. Press “ESC” back to main menu directly. For sake of entering the command menu again, a

command menu will be recorded in the quick menu after its execution. Five latest command

menus can be recorded in the quick menu. When five command menus are recorded, the latest

command menu will cover the earliest one, adopting the “first in first out” principle. It is arranged

from top to bottom and in accordance with the execution order of command menus.

Press “▲” to enter the main menu with the interface as shown in the following diagram:



Quick Menu

Language

Clock

MainMenu

For the first powered protective device, there is no record in quick menu. Press “▲” to enter the

main menu with the interface as shown in the following diagram:

Local Cmd

Print

Settings

Records

Measurements

Status

Information

Language

Test

Clock

The descriptions about menu is based on the maximized configuration, for a specific project, if

some function is not available, the corresponding submenu will hidden.

8.2.2 Main Menus

The menu of the PCS-921 is organized into main menu and submenus, much like a PC directory

structure. The menu of the PCS-921 is divided into 10 sections:



Main Menu

Settings

Print

Information

Test

Clock

Language

Status

Records

Measurements

Local Cmd

Figure 8.2-1 Menu tree

Under the main interface, press “▲” to enter the main menu, and select submenu by pressing “▲”,

“▼” and “ENT”. The command menu adopts a tree shaped content structure. The above diagram

provides the integral structure and all main menus under menu tree of the protection device.

8.2.3 Sub Menus

8.2.3.1 Measurements

Main Menu

Measurements2

Measurements1

Measurements

Measurements3

This menu is used to display real-time measured values, including AC voltage, AC current, phase

angle and calculated quantities. These data can help users to acquaint the device’s status. This

menu comprises following submenus. Please refer to Section “Measurement” about the detailed

measured values.

No. Item Function description

1 Measurement1 Display measured values from protection calculation DSP (Displayed in



secondary value)

2 Measurement2 Display measured values from fault detector DSP (Displayed in

secondary value)

3 Measurement3 Display measured primary values and other calculated quantities

8.2.3.2 Status

Main Menu

Contact Inputs

Inputs

Status

Outputs

GOOSE Inputs

Superv State

Prot Superv

Contact Outputs

FD Superv

GOOSE Superv

SV Superv

GOOSE Outputs

Interlock Status

This menu is used to display real time input signals, output signals and alarm signals of the device.

These data can help users to acquaint the device′s status. This menu comprises following

submenus. Please refer to Section “Signal List” about the detailed input and output signals, and

Section “Supervision Alarms” about alarm signals.


1 Inputs Display all input signal states

2 Outputs Display all output signal states

3 Superv State Display supervision alarm states

The submenu “Inputs” comprises the following command menus.




1 Contact Inputs Display states of binary inputs derived from opto-isolated channels

2 GOOSE Inputs Display states of GOOSE binary inputs.

The submenu “Outputs” comprises the following command menus.


1 Contact Outputs Display states of contact binary outputs

2 GOOSE Outputs Display states of GOOSE binary outputs

3 Interlock Status Display states of interlock result of each remote control.

The submenu “Superv State” comprises the following command menus.


1 Prot Superv Display states of self-supervision signals from protection calculation DSP

2 FD Superv Display states of self-supervision signals from fault detector DSP

3 GOOSE Superv Display states of GOOSE self-supervision signals

4 SV Superv Display states of SV self-supervision signals

8.2.3.3 Records

Main Menu

Device Logs

Superv Events

Disturb Records

IO Events

Records

Clear_Records

This menu is used to display all kinds of records, including the disturbance records, supervision

events, binary events and device logs, so that the operator can load to view and use as the

reference of analyzing accidents and repairing the device. All records are stored in non-volatile

memory, it can still record them even if it loses its power.

This menu comprises the following submenus.


1 Disturb Records Display disturbance records of the device

2 Superv Events Display supervision events of the device

3 IO Events Display binary events of the device

4 Device Logs Display device logs of the device

5 Control Logs Display control logs of the device



6 Clear Records Clear all records.

8.2.3.4 Settings

Main Menu

GOOSE Links

Function Links

Settings

System Settings

SV Links

Prot Settings

Logic Links

Device Setup

Comm Settings

Device Settings

Label Settings

Spare Links

AuxE Settings

FD Settings

OC Settings

ROC Settings

DeadZone Settings

BFP Settings

PD Settings

VTS/CTS Settings

AR/Syn Settings

Trip Logic Settings

Copy Settings

DPos Settings

Syn Settings

Control Settings

Mon/Ctrl Settings

Interlock Settings



This menu is used to check the device setup, system parameters, protection settings and logic

links settings, as well as modifying any of the above setting items. Moreover, it can also execute

the setting copy between different setting groups.



1 System Settings Check or modify the system parameters

2 Prot Settings Check or modify the protection settings

3 Mon/Ctrl Settings Check or modify the measurement and control settings

4 Logic Links Check or modify the logic links settings, including function links, SV links,

GOOSE links and spare links

5 Device Setup Check or modify the device setup

The submenu “Prot Settings” includes the following command menus.


1 FD Settings Check or modify fault detector settings

2 AuxE Settings Check or modify auxiliary element settings

3 OC Settings Check or modify phase overcurrent protection settings

4 ROC Settings Check or modify residual overcurrent protection settings

5 BFP Settings Check or modify breaker failure protection settings

6 DeadZone Settings Check or modify dead zone protection settings

7 PD Settings Check or modify pole discrepancy protection settings

8 VTS/CTS Settings Check or modify VT circuit supervision and CT circuit supervision

settings

9 Trip Logic Settings Check or modify trip logic settings

10 AR/Syn Settings Check or modify auto-reclosing and synchronism check settings

11 Copy Settings Copy setting between different setting groups

The submenu “Mon/Ctrl Settings” includes the following command menus.


1 Syn Settings Check or modify manual sysnchronism check settings

2 DPos Settings Check or modify double point binary input settings

3 Control Settings Check or modify control settings

4 Interlock Settings Check or modify interlock settings

The submenu “Logic Links” comprises the following command menus.


1 Function Links Check or modify function links settings



2 GOOSE Links Check or modify GOOSE links settings

3 SV Links Check or modify SV links settings

4 Spare Links Check or modify spare links settings (used for programmable logic)

The submenu “Device Setup” comprises the following command menus.


1 Device Settings Check or modify the device settings.

2 Comm Settings Check or modify the communication settings.

3 Label Settings Check or modify the label settings of each protection element.

8.2.3.5 Print

Main Menu

Settings

Device Info

Print

Device Setup

All Settings

Disturb Records

Superv Events

IO Events

Device Status

Waveform

IEC103 Info

Cancel Print

System Settings

Prot Settings

Mon/Ctrl Settings

Logic Links

Latest Chgd Settings

This menu is used to print device description, settings, all kinds of records, waveform, information

related with IEC60870-5-103 protocol, channel state and channel statistic.





1 Device Info Print the description information of the device, including software

version.

2 Settings

Print device setup, system parameters, protection settings and logic

links settings. It can print by different classifications as well as printing all

settings of the device. Besides, it can also print the latest modified

settings.

3 Disturb Records Print the disturbance records

4 Superv Events Print the supervision events

5 IO Events Print the binary events

6 Device Status Print the current state of the device, including the sampled value of

voltage and current, the state of binary inputs, setting and so on

7 Waveform Print the recorded waveform

8 IEC103 Info

Print 103 Protocol information, including function type (FUN),

information serial number (INF), general classification service group

number, and channel number (ACC)

9 Cancel Print Cancel the print command

The submenu “Settings” comprises the following submenus.


1 System Settings Print the system parameters

2 Prot Settings Print the protection settings

3 Mon/Ctrl Settings Print the measurement and control settings

4 Logic Links Print the logic links settings

5 Device Setup Print the settings related to device setup

6 All Settings Print all settings including device setup, system parameters, protection

settings and logic links settings

7 Latest Chgd Settings Print the setting latest modified

The submenu “Prot Settings” comprises the following command menus.


1 FD Settings Print fault detector element settings

2 AuxE Settings Print auxiliary element settings

3 OC Settings Print phase overcurrent protection settings

4 ROC Settings Print directional earth-fault protection settings

5 BFP Settings Print breaker failure protection settings

6 Deadzone Settings Print dead zone settings

7 PD Settings Print pole discrepancy protection settings



8 VTS/CTS Settings Print VT circuit supervision and CT circuit supervision settings

9 Trip Logic Settings Print trippling logic settings

10 AR/Syn Settings Print synchronism check and auto-reclosing settings

11 All Settings Print all settings included in “Prot Settings” submenu

The submenu “Mon/Ctrl Settings” includes the following command menus.


1 Syn Settings Print manual sysnchronism check settings

2 DPos Settings Print double point binary input settings

3 Control Settings Print control settings

4 Interlock Settings Print interlock settings

5 All Settings Print all settings included in “Mon/Ctrl Settings” submenu

The submenu “Logic Links” comprises the following command menus.


1 Function Links Print function links settings

2 GOOSE Links Print GOOSE links settings

3 SV Links Print SV links settings

4 Spare Links Print spare links settings (used for programmable logic)

5 All Settings Print all settings included in “Logic Links” submenu

The submenu “Device Setup” comprises the following command menus.


1 Device Settings Print the device settings.

2 Comm Settings Print the communication settings.

3 Label Settings Print the label settings of each protection element.

4 All Settings Print all settings included in “Device Setup” submenu



8.2.3.6 Local Cmd

Main Menu

Local Cmd

Reset Target

Trig Oscillograph

Download

Clear Counter

Control

Clear Energy Counter

Clear AR Counter

This menu is used to reset the tripping relay with latch, indicator LED, LCD display, and as same

as the resetting function of binary inputs. This menu provides a method of manually recording the

current waveform data of the device under normal condition for printing and uploading SAS.

Besides, it can send out the request of program download, clear statistic information about

GOOSE SV AR and energy.



1 Reset Target Reset the local signal, indicator LED, LCD display and so on

2 Trig Oscillograph Trigger waveform recording

3 Control Manually operating to trip, close output or for signaling purpose

4 Download Send out the request of downloading program

5 Clear Counter Clear GOOSE and SV statistic data

6 Clear AR Counter Clear AR statistic data

7 Clear Energy Counter Clear all energy metering values (i.e. PHr+_Pri, PHr-_Pri, Qr+_Pri,

QHr-_Pri)

8.2.3.7 Information

Main Menu

Information

Version Info

Board Info

In this menu, the LCD displays software information of all kinds of intelligent plug-in modules,



which consists of version, creating time of software, CRC codes and management sequence

number. Besides, plug-in module information can also be viewed.

This menu comprises the following command menus.


1 Version Info

Display software information of DSP module, MON module and HMI module,

which consists of version, creating time of software, CRC codes and

management sequence number.

2 Board Info Monitor the current working state of each intelligent module.

8.2.3.8 Test

Main Menu

Test

Device Test

GOOSE Comm Counter

SV Comm Counter

Disturb Events

Superv Events

IO Events

AR Counter

This menu is mainly used for developers to debug the program and for engineers to maintain the

protection device. It can be used to fulfill the communication test function. It is also used to

generate all kinds of reports or events to transmit to the SAS without any external input, so as to

debug the communication on site. Besides, it can also display statistic information about GOOSE

SV and AR.



1 GOOSE Counter Check communication statistics data of GOOSE

2 SV Counter Check communication statistics data of SV (Sampled Values)

3 AR Counter Check AR counters

4 Device Test

Automatically generate all kinds of reports or events to transmit to SCADA,

including disturbance records, self-supervision events and binary events. It can

realize the report uploading by different classification, as well as the uploading

of all kinds of reports

The submenu “Device Test” comprises the following submenus.




1 Disturb Events View the relevant information about disturbance records (only used for

debugging persons)

2 Superv Events View the relevant information about supervision events (only used for

debugging persons)

3 IO Events View the relevant information about binary events (only used for debugging

persons)

Users can respectively execute the test automatically or manually by selecting commands “All

Test” or “Select Test”.

The submenu “Disturb Events” comprises the following command menus.


1 All Test Ordinal test of all protection elements

2 Select Test Selective test of corresponding classification

The submenu “Superv Events” comprises the following command menus.


1 All Test Ordinal test of all self-supervisions


The submenu “IO Events” comprises the following command menus.


1 All Test Ordinal test of change of all binary inputs


8.2.3.9 Clock

The current time of internal clock can be viewed here. The time is displayed in the form

YY-MM-DD and hh:mm:ss. All values are presented with digits and can be modified.

8.2.3.10 Language

This menu is mainly used to set LCD display language.

8.3 LCD Display

8.3.1 Overview

There are five kinds of LCD display, SLD (single line diagram) display, tripping reports, alarm

reports, binary input changing reports and control reports. Tripping reports and alarm reports will

not disappear until these reports are acknowledged by pressing the “RESET” button in the

protection panel (i.e. energizing the binary input [BI_RstTarg]). User can press both “ENT” and

“ESC” at the same time to switch the display among trip reports, alarm reports and the SLD display.

IO events will be displayed for 5s and then it will return to the previous display interface



automatically. Device logs will not pop up and can only be viewed by navigating the corresponding

menu.

8.3.2 Normal Display

After the protection device is powered and entered into the initiating interface, it takes 30 seconds

to complete the initialization of protection device. During the initialization of protection device, the

“HEALTHY” indicator lamp of the protection device goes out.

The device can display single line diagram (SLD) and primary operation information, it can support

wiring configuration function. LCD configuration file can be downloaded via the network. Remote

control operating through single line diagram is also supported.

Under normal condition, the LCD will display the following interface. The LCD adopts white color

as its backlight that is activated if once there is any keyboard operation, and is extinguished

automatically after 60 seconds of no operation.

2010-06-08 10:10:00

Ia

0.02V

0.00V

0.00V

3U0

Addr 24343 Group 01

0.00A

Ib

Ic

0.00A

0.00A

Ua

Ub

Uc

UB1

0.02V

0.00V

UL2

f_Line

0.00V

50.00Hz

3I0 0.00A

UB2 0.00V

The content displayed on the screen contains: the current date and time of the protection device

(with a format of yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss:), the active setting group number, the three-phase

current sampling value, the neutral current sampling value, the three-phase voltage sampling

value, the neutral voltage sampling value, the synchronism voltage sampling value, line frequency

and the address relevant to IP address of Ethernet A. If all the sampling values of the voltage and

the current can’t be fully displayed within one screen, they will be scrolling-displayed automatically

from the top to the bottom.

If IP address of Ethernet A is “xxx.xxx.a.b”, the displayed address equals to (a×256+b). For

example, If IP address of Ethernet A is “198.087.095.023”, the displayed address will be

“95×256+23=24343”.

If the device has detected any abnormal state, it′ll display the self-check alarm information.



8.3.3 Display Disturbance Records

This device can store 1024 disturbance records and 64 disturbance records with fault waveform.

When there is protection element operating, the LCD will automatically display the latest

disturbance record, and two kinds of LCD display interfaces will be available depending on

whether there are supervision events at present.

For the situation that the disturbance records and the supervision events coexist, the upper half

part is the disturbance record, and the lower half part is the supervision event. As to the upper half

part, it displays separately the record number of the disturbance record, fault name, generating

time of the disturbance record (with a format of yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss), protection element and

tripping element. If there is protection element operation, faulty phase and relative operation time

with reference to fault detector element are displayed. At the same time, if displayed rows of

protection element and tripping element are more than 3, a scroll bar will appear at the right. The

height of the black part of the scroll bar basically indicates the total lines of protection element and

tripping element, and its position suggests the position of the currently displayed line of the total

lines. The scroll bar of protection element and tripping element will roll up at the speed of one line

per time. When it rolls to the last three lines, it will roll from the earliest protection element and

tripping element again. The displayed content of the lower half part is similar to that of the upper

half part.

If the device has no the supervision event, the display interface will only show the disturbance

record.

1. Disturb Records NO.2

2008-11-28 07:10:00:200

A24 ms 50/51P1.Op

0 ms FD.DPFC.Pkp

If the device has the supervision event, the display interface will show the disturbance record and

the supervision event at the same time.



1. Disturb Records NO.2

2008-11-28 07:10:00:200

A24 ms

FD.DPFC.Pkp0 ms

50/51P1.Op

2. Superv Events NO.3

2008-11-28 07:09:00:200

Alm_52b

Disturb Records NO.2 shows the title and SOE number of the disturbance record.

2008-11-28 07:10:00:200 shows the time when fault detector picks up, the format is

year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond.

0ms FD.DPFC.Pkp shows fault detector element and its operating time (set as 0ms

fixedly).

24ms A 50/51P1.Op shows operation element and its relative operation time

All the protection elements have been listed in Chapter “Operation Theory”, and please refer to

each protection element for details. Operation reports of fault detector and the reports related to

oscillography function are showed in the following table.

Table 8.3-1 Tripping report messages

No. Message Description

1 ManTrigDFR Oscillography function is triggered manually.

2 RmtTrigDFR Oscillography function is triggered remotely.

8.3.4 Display Supervision Event

This device can store 1024 pieces of supervision events. During the running of the device, the

supervision event of hardware self-check errors or system running abnormity will be displayed

immediately.



2. Superv Events NO.4

2008-12-29 9:18:47:500ms

Alm_52b 0 1

Superv_Events NO.4 shows the SOE number and title of the supervision event

2008-11-28 09:18:47:500 shows the real time of the report: year–month-date and

hour:minute:second:millisecond

Alm_52b 0→1 shows the content of abnormality alarm

8.3.5 Display IO Events

This device can store 1024 pieces of binary events. During the running of the device, the binary

input will be displayed once its state has changed, i.e. from “0” to “1” or from “1” to “0”.

3. IO Events NO.4

2008-11-29 09:18:47:500ms

BI_RstTarg 0 1

IO Events NO.4 shows the number and title of the binary event

2008-11-28 09:18:47:50 shows date and time when the report occurred, the format is

year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond

BI_RstTarg 0→1 shows the state change of binary input, including binary input



name, original state and final state

8.3.6 Display Device Logs

This device can store 1024 pieces of device logs. During the running of the device, the device log

will be displayed after any operation of it is conducted.

4. Device Logs NO.4

Reboot

2008-11-28 10:18:47:569ms

Device Logs NO. 4 shows the title and the number of the device log

2008-11-28 10:18:47:569 shows date and time when the report occurred, the format is

year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond

Reboot shows the manipulation content of the device log

User operating information listed below may be displayed.

Table 8.3-2 User operating event list

No. Message Description

1 Reboot The device has been reboot.

2 Settings_Chg The device′s settings have been changed.

3 ActiveGrp_Chgd Active setting group has been changed.

4 Report_Cleared All reports have been deleted. (Device logs can not be deleted)

5 Waveform_Cleared All waveforms have been deleted.

6 Process_Exit A process has exited.

7 Counter_Cleared Clear counter

8 Signal_Reset Reset signal

It will be displayed on the LCD before the fault report and self-check report are confirmed. Only

pressing the restore button on the protection screen or pressing both “ENT” and “ESC” at the

same time can switch among the fault report, the self-check report and the normal running state of

protection device to display it. The binary input change report will be displayed for 5s and then it

will return to the previous display interface automatically.



8.4 Keypad Operation

8.4.1 View Device Measurements

The operation is as follows:

1. Press the “▲” to enter the main menu;

2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Measurements” menu, and then press the

“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu;

3. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the “ENT” to

enter the menu;

4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one display

screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most);

5. Press the “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu;

6. Press the “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Measurements” menu);

8.4.2 View Device Status


1. Press the key “▲” to enter the main menu.

2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Status” menu, and then press the “ENT”

or “►” to enter the menu.

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu item, and then press the

key “ENT” to enter the submenu.

4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one display

screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most).

5. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu.

6. Press the key “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Status” menu).

8.4.3 View Device Records



2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Records” menu, and then press the “ENT” or

“►” to enter the menu;


enter the menu;

4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to page up/down;

5. Press the “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next record;




7. Press the “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Records” menu);

8.4.4 Print Device Report



2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Print” menu, and then press the “ENT” or “►”

to enter the menu;


enter the menu;

Selecting the “Disturb Records”, and then press the “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next

record. After pressing the key “ENT”, the LCD will display “Start Printing... ”, and then

automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu “Print”). If the printer doesn’t complete its

current print task and re-start it for printing, and the LCD will display “Printer Busy…”. Press

the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Print”).

Selecting the command menu “Superv Events” or “IO Events”, and then press the key “▲” or

“▼” to move the cursor. Press the “＋” or “－” to select the starting and ending numbers of

printing message. After pressing the key “ENT”, the LCD will display “Start Printing…”, and

then automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu “Print”). Press the key “ESC” to exit

this menu (returning to the menu “Print”).

4. If selecting the command menu “Device Info”, “Device Status“ or “IEC103_Info”, press the

key “ENT”, the LCD will display “Start printing..”, and then automatically exit this menu

(returning to the menu “Print”).

5. If selecting the “Settings”, press the key “ENT” or “►” to enter the next level of menu.

6. After entering the submenu “Settings”, press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor, and then

press the key “ENT” to print the corresponding default value. If selecting any item to printing:

Press the key “＋” or “－” to select the setting group to be printed. After pressing the key

“ENT”, the LCD will display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning

to the menu “Settings”). Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu

“Settings”).

7. After entering the submenu “Waveforms”, press the “＋” or “－” to select the waveform item

to be printed and press ”ENT” to enter. If there is no any waveform data, the LCD will display

“No Waveform Data!” (Before executing the command menu “Waveforms”, it is necessary to

execute the command menu “Trig Oscillograph” in the menu “Local Cmd”, otherwise the

LCD will display “No Waveform Data!”). With waveform data existing:

Press the key “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next record. After pressing the key “ENT”, the LCD

will display “Start Printing…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu

“Waveforms”). If the printer does not complete its current print task and re-start it for printing, and



the LCD will display “Printer Busy…”. Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu

“Waveforms”).

8.4.5 View Device Setting



2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Settings” menu, and then press the “ENT” or



enter the menu;

4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor;

5. Press the “+” or “-” to page up/down;


7. Press the “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings”).

NOTE!

If the displayed information exceeds 14 lines, the scroll bar will appear on the right side of

the LCD to indicate the quantity of all displayed information of the command menu and the

relative location of information where the current cursor points at.

8.4.6 Modify Device Setting






enter the menu;

4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor;

5. Press the “+” or “-” to page up/down;


7. Press the “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings” );

8. If selecting the command menu “System Settings”, move the cursor to the setting item to be

modified, and then press the “ENT”;

Press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value (if the modified value is of multi-bit, press the “◄” or “►”

to move the cursor to the digit bit, and then press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value), press the



“ESC” to cancel the modification and return to the displayed interface of the command menu

“System Settings”. Press the “ENT” to automatically exit this menu (returning to the displayed

interface of the command menu “System Settings”).

Move the cursor to continue modifying other setting items. After all setting values are modified,

press the “◄”, “►” or “ESC”, and the LCD will display “Save or Not?”. Directly press the “ESC” or

press the “◄” or “►” to move the cursor. Select the “Cancel”, and then press the “ENT” to

automatically exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command menu “System

Settings”).

Press the “◄” or “►” to move the cursor. Select “No” and press the “ENT”, all modified setting item

will restore to its original value, exit this menu (returning to the menu “Settings”).

Press the “◄” or “►” to move the cursor to select “Yes”, and then press the “ENT”, the LCD will

display password input interface.

Please Input Password:

_ _ _ _

Input a 4-bit password (“＋”, “◄”, “▲” and “－”). If the password is incorrect, continue inputting it,

and then press the “ESC” to exit the password input interface and return to the displayed interface

of the command menu “System Settings”. If the password is correct, LCD will display “Save

Setting Now…”, and then exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command

menu “System Settings”), with all modified setting items as modified values.

NOTE!

For different setting items, their displayed interfaces are different but their modification

methods are the same. The following is ditto.

9. If selecting the submenu “Prot Settings”, and press “ENT” to enter. After selecting different

command menu, the LCD will display the following interface: (take “FD Settings” as an

example)



FD Settings

Please Select Group for Config

Active Group : 01

Selected Group : 02

Press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value, and then press the “ENT” to enter it. Move the cursor to

the setting item to be modified, press the “ENT” to enter.

Take the setting [FD.DPFC.I_Set] as an example is selected to modify, then press the “ENT” to

enter and the LCD will display the following interface. is shown the “＋” or “－” to modify the value

and then press the “ENT” to confirm.

FD.DPFC.I_Set

Modified Value

Current Value

Min Value

0.200

0.050

Max Value 30.000

0.202

NOTE!

After modifying protection settings in current active setting group or system parameters of

the device, the “HEALTHY” indicator lamp of the device will go out, and the device will

automatically restart and re-check them. If the check doesn’t pass, the device will be

blocked.



8.4.7 Copy Device Setting





3. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Copy Settings”, and then

press the “ENT” to enter the menu.

Copy Settings

Active Group: 01

Copy To Group: 02

Press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value. Press the “ESC”, and return to the menu “Settings”.

Press the “ENT”, the LCD will display the interface for password input, if the password is incorrect,

continue inputting it, press the “ESC” to exit the password input interface and return to the menu

“Settings”. If the password is correct, the LCD will display “copy setting OK!”, and exit this menu

(returning to the menu “Settings”).

8.4.8 Switch Setting Group


1. Exit the main menu;

2. Press the “GRP”



Change Active Group

Active Group: 01

Change To Group: 02

Press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value, and then press the “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to

the main menu). After pressing the “ENT”, the LCD will display the password input interface. If the

password is incorrect, continue inputting it, and then press the “ESC” to exit the password input

interface and return to its original state. If the password is correct, the “HEALTHY” indicator lamp

of the protection device will go out, and the protection device will re-check the protection setting. If

the check doesn’t pass, the protection device will be blocked. If the check is successful, the LCD

will return to its original state.

8.4.9 Delete Device Records


1. Exit the main menu;

2. Press the “＋”, “－”, “＋”, “－” and “ENT”; Press the “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the

original state). Press the “ENT” to carry out the deletion.

Press <ENT> To Clear

Press <ESC> To Exit



NOTE!

The operation of deleting device message will delete all messages saved by the protection

device, including disturbance records, supervision events, binary events, but not including

device logs. Furthermore, the message is irrecoverable after deletion, so the application of

the function shall be cautious.

8.4.10 Remote Control

Control operation method is introduced as below:


2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Local Cmd”, and

then press the key “ENT” to enter submenus. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the

cursor to the command menu “Control”, and then press the key “ENT” to enter and the

following display will be shown on LCD.

Password:

_ _ _

Input a 3-bit password (“111”). If the password is incorrect, continue inputting it, and then press the

“ESC” to exit the password input interface and return to the displayed interface of the command

menu “Control”. If the password is correct, it will go to the following step.

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the control object and press the key

“ENT” to select control object.



Control

Step1: select Control Object

CSWI01

10.

8.

7.

6.

5.

4.

3.

2.

CSWI09

CSWI08

CSWI07

CSWI06

CSWI05

CSWI04

CSWI03

CSWI02

9.

CSWI10

1.

4. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select control command press the key “ENT” to the next step.

Three control commands are optional:

1) Open (Step down): Remote open

2) Close (Step up): Remote close

3) Stop: Reserved

CSWI01

(Stop)Close(Step up)Open(Step down)

DeadCheckSynchroCheckNoCheck

InterlockNotChkInterlockChk

CancleExecuteSelect

Result

Step2: select Control Command

EF Line SelectionLoopCheck

5. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select synchronism check mode and press the key “ENT” to

the next step.

Five synchronism check modes are optional:

1) NoCheck: Without any check

2) SynchroCheck: Synchronism-check mode



3) DeadCheck: Dead check mode

4) LoopCheck: Reserved

5) EF Line Selection: Reserved

NoCheck

CSWI01


DeadCheckSynchroCheck

InterlockNotChkInterlockChk

CancleExecuteSelect

Result

Step3: select Execution Condition


6. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select interlock mode and press the key “ENT” to next step.

Two interlock check modes are optional:

1) InterlockChk: Check interlocking criteria

2) InterlockNotChk: Not check interlocking criteria

InterLockNotChk

NoCheck

CSWI01



InterlockChk

CancleExecuteSelect

Result

Step4: select Interlock Condition


7. Press the key “◄” or “►” to select control type and press the key “ENT”.

As shown in the following figure, operation results will be shown after “Result” at the bottom of the

LCD.



Three synchronism control types are optional:

1) Select: Select control object

2) Execute: Execute control operation

3) Cancle: Cancle control operation

Select

InterLockNotChk

NoCheck

CSWI01



InterlockChk

CancleExecute

Result

Step5: select Control Type


NOTE!

“Exectue” operation must be operated after “Select” operation.

8.4.11 Modify Device Clock



2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Clock” menu, and then press the “ENT” to

enter clock display

3. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the date or time to be modified;

4. Press the “+” or “-” to modify value, and then press the “ENT” to save the modification and

return to the main menu;

5. Press the “ESC” to cancel the modification and return to the main menu.



Clock

Month

Year

Day

11

2008

28

Hour 20

Minute

Second

59

14

8.4.12 View Module Information



2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Information” menu, and then press the “ENT”

or “►” to enter the menu;

3. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Board Info”, and then press

the “ENT” to enter the menu;

4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the scroll bar;

5. Press the “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “Information” menu).

8.4.13 Check Software Version


1. Press the “▲” to enter the main menu.

2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Information” menu, and then press the “ENT”

to enter the submenu.

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Version Info”, and then

press the key “ENT” to display the software version.

4. Press the “ESC” to return to the main menu.

8.4.14 Communication Test



2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “Test” menu, and then press the key

“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu.



3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the submenu “Device Test”, and then press

the key “ENT” to enter the submenu, to select test item. If “Disturb Events” “Superv Events”

or “IO Events” is selected, two options “All Test” and “Select Test” are provided.

Prot Element

Select Test

All Test

4. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to select the corresponding command menu “All

Test” or “Select Test”. If selecting the “All Test”, press the “ENT”, and the device will

successively carry out all operation element message test one by one.

5. If “Select Test” is selected, press the key “ENT”. Press the “＋” or “－” to page up/down, and

then press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the scroll bar. Move the cursor to select the

corresponding protection element. Press the key “ENT” to execute the communication test of

this protection element, the substation automatic system (SAS) will receive the corresponding

message.

NOTE!

If no input operation is carried out within 60s, exit the communication transmission and

return to the “Test” menu, at this moment, the LCD will display “Communication Test

Timeout and Exiting...”.

Press the key “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “Test”, at this moment, the LCD will

display “Communication Test Exiting…”.

8.4.15 Select Language



2. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “Language”, and then

press the key “ENT” to enter the menu and the following display will be shown on LCD.



Please Select Language:

English

中文1

2

3. Press the key “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the language user preferred and press the key

“ENT” to execute language switching. After language switching is finished, LCD will return

to the menu “Language”, and the display language is changed. Otherwise, press the key

“ESC” to cancel language switching and return to the menu “Language”.

NOTE!

LCD interface provided in this chapter is only a reference and available for explaining

specific definition of LCD. The displayed interface of the actual device may be some

different from it, so you shall be subject to the actual protection device.




Table of Contents

9.1 General Description ........................................................................................ 9-1

9.2 Introduction on PCS-Explorer software ........................................................ 9-1

9.3 GOOSE Introduction ....................................................................................... 9-2

9.3.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................. 9-2


9.3.3 Maintenance Mechanism ..................................................................................................... 9-5

9.4 Signal List ........................................................................................................ 9-6

9.4.1 Input Signals ........................................................................................................................ 9-6

9.4.2 Output Signals ................................................................................................................... 9-10

List of Figures

Figure 9.3-1 Typical GOOOSE networking scheme ................................................................. 9-2

Figure 9.3-2 GOOSE send mechanism ..................................................................................... 9-3

List of Tables

Table 9.4-1 Input signals ............................................................................................................. 9-6

Table 9.4-2 Output signals ........................................................................................................ 9-10



9.1 General Description

By adoption of PCS-Explorer software, it is able to make device configuration, function

configuration, LCD configuration, binary input and binary output configuration, LED indicator

configuration and programming logic for PCS-921.

9.2 Introduction on PCS-Explorer software

PCS-Explorer software is developed in order to meet customer’s demand on functions of UAPC

platform device such as device configuration and programmable design. It selects substation as

the core of data management and the device as fundamental unit, supporting one substation to

govern many devices. The software provides on-line and off-line functions: on-line mode: Ethernet

connected with the device supporting IEC60870-5-103 and capable of uploading and downloading

configuration files through Ethernet net; off-line mode: off-line setting configuration. In addition, it

also supports programmable logic to meet customer’s demand.

After function configuration is finished, disabled protection function will be hidden in the device and

in setting configuration list of PCS-Explorer Software. The user can select to show or hide some

setting by this way, and modify the setting value.

Please refer to the instruction manual “PCS-Explorer Auxiliary Software” for details.

Overall functions:

Programmable logic (off-line function)

Device configuration (off-line function)

Function configuration (off-line function)

LCD configuration (off-line function)

LED indicators configuration (off-line function)

Binary signals configuration (off-line function)

Setting configuration (off-line & on-line function)

Real-time display of analogue and digital quantity of device (on-line function)

Display of sequence of report (SOE) (on-line function)

Analysis of waveform (off-line & on-line function)

File downloading/uploading (on-line function)



9.3 GOOSE Introduction

9.3.1 Overview

Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE) is the mechanism in IEC61850 standard

used to satisfy fast message demand of substation automation system, and provides means of

fast information transmission and exchange under network communication conditions. In case of

any status change, intelligent electronic device (IED) will use change report to transmit binary

objects in high speed, i.e. GOOSE report. Information exchange among IEDs is realized by

GOOSE.

PCS-900 series features GOOSE network message interface independent of MMS message

interface and of high real-time property. Therefore, PCS-900 series can receive binary inputs via

opto-coupler and send output commands via binary output contact, as well as GOOSE input

signals, and can configure GOOSE output commands and GOOSE output signals. Configuration

of GOOSE signals is obtained by GOOSE file based on SCD file.

PCS-900 series supports single network mode and dual network mode, P2P mode and networking

mode, as well as mode based on station level network MMS or process level network. Networking

mode can be selected by parameters setup or configuration tool PCS-Explorer. For important

occasions, in order to ensure no loss of data during transmission, it is recommended to configure

dual GOOSE network in which process level is independent of station level for the protection

device. Refer to the figure as below.

Gateway

GPSServer A/

WorkstationPrinter

Bay Level

Station Level

Server B/

Workstation

Process Level

Engineering

Workstation

Switch

Optical Fiber

Maintenance

Workstation

Satellite-Synchronized

Clock

Protocol Converter

Third-Party IEDs

PCS-9700

Bay Control Unit

PCS-900

Protection

PCS-900

Protection

Electronic/Optical CT & VTCircuit Breaker: GIS/AIS

Process Bus: Sampled Value, GOOSE (Tripping/Binary Input), IEEE 1588, GMRP Clock Synchronization

Station Bus: MMS, GOOSE (Interlocking), SNTP

Switch

Control Center

PCS-222

Circuit Breaker Controller

PCS-221

Merging Unit

……

……

Figure 9.3-1 Typical GOOOSE networking scheme

The above figure shows a typical dual network mode, in which process level network is separate

from station level network, to ensure that important information (e.g. tripping signal) is not affected

by data on the MMS data network.



Ring network is not recommended for GOOSE network configuration, to avoid the problem of

network storm. Duplicated protection configuration and their GOOSE networks shall be totally

independent of each other, to ensure that in case of any network fault in one set of duplicated

protection configuration, the other set will not be affected.


IEC 61850 provides substation configuration language (SCL) based on XML, which has

standardized description of substation systems and device configuration. There are four types of

SCL files:

SSD: Substation Specification Description

SCD: Substation Configuration Description

ICD: IED Capability Description

CID: Configured IED Description

Normally, manufacturers provide ICD file, system integrator prepare SCD file of the whole

substation according to design blueprints, and each IED manufacturer exports its CID file after

receiving SCD configuration model.

9.3.2.1 GOOSE Transmission

GOOSE service is directly mapped to network data link layer. To ensure important information

transmission priority, broadcast address is used for multi-channle transmission of information.

GOOSE message allows high-speed transmission of tripping signals, which has high transmission

success rate.

GOOSE message is not sent at fixed interval. When there is no GOOSE event, interval of GOOSE

message transmission is fixed and relatively long. However, after an event occurs, data

transmission will change, and the interval set for this occasion is the shortest. GOOSE adopts

continual repeated transmission to realize reliable transmission, and during this period,

transmission interval will gradually increase, till the event status becomes stable. Later, GOOSE

message transmission will be back to fixed interval. The whole process is shown as below:

Event

Transmission Time

Figure 9.3-2 GOOSE send mechanism

Where:

T0 is retransmission in stable conditions (no event for a long time), and it can be configured

(typical value is 5000ms)

T1 is the shortest retransmission time after the event, and it can be configured (typical value is



2ms)

T2 is retransmission times until achieving the stable conditions time, and it is fixed at 2T1.

T3 is retransmission times until achieving the stable conditions time, and it is fixed at 4T1.

GOOSE transmission adopts retransmission mechanism and has 4 transmission times: T0, T1, T2,

and T3. After the event occurs, a frame message will be transmitted, transmitting again after

interval T1, and still transmitting after another interval T1. And then, transmitting again after

interval T2 and yet transmitting after interval T3. At this time, if no new event occurs, transmission

will continue at interval T0 again.

Data transmitted are defined by definition of GOOSE transmission dataset and GOOSE control

blocks. PCS-900 series supports transmission of 8 GOOSE control blocks at maximum. GOOSE

can transmit both binary quantities and analog quantities of not large change, e.g. temperature

and humidity.

9.3.2.2 GOOSE Reception

At maximum, PCS-900 series can receive 128 control block data, subject to control by GOOSE

Links. GOOSE reception control block is controlled by GOOSE links of corresponding serial

number, and provides corresponding alarm signal of the same serial number.

After the receiver receives GOOSE data, if GOOSE data is invalid (refer to section 9.3.2.3), the

GOOSE data shall be processed accordingly, i.e. clear (zero), force to 1, or keep.

9.3.2.3 Invalid GOOSE Data

In case of any of the following, invalid GOOSE data will be reported:

1. The next frame of GOOSE message is not received within 1.1 times of maximum message

survival time

2. GOOSE reception link is disabled

3. Inconsistent version No. or mismatching dataset data

4. Device test mode is inconsistent with message “Test” state

NOTE!

Each frame of transmitted GOOSE data includes maximum message survival time,

normally 2 times of GOOSE heartbeat time (t0)

“Test” state of GOOSE message is set to 1 if the reception control block receives message

with “Test” bit, otherwise it is set to 0 if message without “Test” bit is received.

9.3.2.4 GOOSE Data Link Disconnection

If GOOSE message is not received within 2 times of maximum message survival time, GOOSE

link disconnection will be reported. For example, receiver sets GOOSE heartbeat time (t0) to 5s,



so that specified message survival time in transmitted message is 10s. After GOOSE receives one

frame of message, if the next frame is not received within 11s, , GOOSE data is invalid. If not

received in 20s (2 times of message survival time), GOOSE link disconnection will be reported.

If invalid data or data link disconnection is tested by unplugging network wire, note that since

network line disconnection occurs at any time between two groups of heartbeat messages, invalid

GOOSE data is normally reported in 6~11s after actual disconnection, and GOOSE network link

disconnection is normally reported in 15~20s after actual disconnection.

NOTE!

Invalid GOOSE data is not synchronized with GOOSE link disconnection in time. The

former is reported when message is not received within 1.1 times maximum message

survival time, while the latter is only reported when message is not received within 2 times

maximum message survival time.

9.3.2.5 GOOSE Message Handling Mechanism under Network Storm

This device features fast detection of network storm and fast handling of network messages. In

case of network storm in single network, this device can ensure no loss of normal network

messages, and protection functions will not be affected.

In case of network storm in dual network, this device can maintain reception and handling of

messages in one of the networks, and actual test has shown that protection functions are basically

not affected.

9.3.3 Maintenance Mechanism

For important GOOSE output signal, such as, tripping, reclosing, breaker failure etc., it is

selectable whether they are controlled by “Start” signal, which is monitoring signal of GOOSE

output, and provided by fault detector DSP and separated from protection DSP, to ensure reliability

of output signals.

GOOSE reception and transmission message provide a “Test” bit. The receiver will compare this

“Test” bit in received message with its own “Test” bit. If they are consistent, operation will occur,

otherwise, invalid GOOSE data will be reported (refer to section 9.3.2.3). This eliminates mutual

effect between device in operation and device in maintainence.

Different from traditional contact signals, which can can be set to enable/disable corresponding

signals, PCS-900 series adopts the following modes to enable and disable corresponding signals

including “Test” state.

1. When the “Test” bit in GOOSE message is consistent with the “Test” of the receiver, GOOSE

data is valid, otherwise it is invalid (refer to section 9.3.2.3). In this way, the device in service

and device in maintainence do not affect each other.

2. In “Test” state, the receiver still has event recording and state display functions, to facilitate

check of circuit.



3. GOOSE logic link is provided to solve the problem of selective transmission of signals.

Transmitter can be isolated from receiver by disabling relevant GOOSE logic link. The setup

of transmission and reception logic links can be consistent with traditional logic links.

4. For transmitter, GOOSE element will perform AND of data value and transmission logic link

state, and then detect change of data, so as to decide activation of a new round of

transmission flow.

9.4 Signal List

9.4.1 Input Signals

All input signals for this device are listed in the following table.

If a input signal is gray in PCS-Explorer, it means the input signal is not configurable. If a input

signal is dark in PCS-Explorer, it means the input signal is configurable.

Table 9.4-1 Input signals


Circuit Breaker Position

1 52b_PhA Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase A of corresponding circuit breaker

2 52b_PhB Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase B of corresponding circuit breaker

3 52b_PhC Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase C of corresponding circuit breaker

4 52b Normally closed contact of three-phase of circuit breaker

Auxiliary element

5 AuxE.OCD.En Current change auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from binary


6 AuxE.OCD.Blk Current change auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from binary




























19 AuxE.UVD.En Voltage change auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from binary


20 AuxE.UVD.Blk Voltage change auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from binary


21 AuxE.UVG.En Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered


22 AuxE.UVG.Blk Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered


23 AuxE.UVS.En Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered


24 AuxE.UVS.Blk Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered


25 AuxE.ROV.En Residual voltage auxiliary element enabling input, it is triggered from binary


26 AuxE.ROV.Blk Residual voltage auxiliary element blocking input, it is triggered from binary


Phase Overcurrent Protection

27 50/51Px.En1 Stage x of phase overcurrent protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from


28 50/51Px.En2 Stage x of phase overcurrent protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from


29 50/51Px.Blk Stage x of phase overcurrent protection blocking input, it is triggered from


Earth-fault Protection

30 50/51Gx.En1 Stage x of earth fault protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary


31 50/51Gx.En2 Stage x of earth fault protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary


32 50/51Gx.Blk Stage x of earth fault protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input


Dead Zone Protection







35 50DZ.Blk Dead zone protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or


36 50DZ.Init Initiation signal input of the dead zone protection.


37 50BF.ExTrp3P_L Input signal of three-phase tripping contact from line protection

38 50BF.ExTrp3P_GT Input signal of three-phase tripping contact from generator or transformer

protection

39 50BF.ExTrpA Input signal of phase-A tripping contact from external device

40 50BF.ExTrpB Input signal of phase-B tripping contact from external device

41 50BF.ExTrpC Input signal of phase-C tripping contact from external device

42 50BF.ExTrp_WOI

Input signal of three-phase tripping contact from external device. Once it is

energized, normally closed auxiliary contact of circuit breaker is chosen in

addition to breaker failure current check to trigger breaker failure timers.

43 50BF.En Breaker failure protection enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or


44 50BF.Blk Breaker failure protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or


Pole Discrepancy Protection

45 62PD.En1 Pole discrepancy protection enabling input 1, it is triggered from binary input


46 62PD.En2 Pole discrepancy protection enabling input 2, it is triggered from binary input


47 62PD.Blk Pole discrepancy protection blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or


48 62PD.In_PD Pole discrepancy binary input

Synchronism Check

49 25.Blk_Chk Input signal of blocking synchrocheck function for AR.

50 25.Blk_SynChk Input signal of blocking synchronism check for AR. If the value is “1”, the

output of synchronism check is “0”.

51 25.Blk_DdChk Input signal of blocking dead charge check for AR.

52 25.Start_Chk Input signal of starting synchronism check, usually it was starting signal of AR

from auto-reclosing module.

53 25.Blk_VTS_UB VT circuit supervision (UB) is blocked

54 25.Blk_VTS_UL VT circuit supervision (UL) is blocked

55 25.MCB_VT_UB Binary input for VT MCB auxiliary contact (UB)

56 25.MCB_VT_UL Binary input for VT MCB auxiliary contact (UL)

Auto-reclosure

57 79.En Binary input for enabling AR. If the logic setting [79.En_ExtCtrl]=1, enabling

AR will be controlled by the external signal via binary input

58 79.Blk Binary input for disabling AR. If the logic setting [79.En_ExtCtrl]=1, disabling

AR will be controlled by the external input

59 79.Sel_1PAR Input signal for selecting 1-pole AR mode of corresponding circuit breaker

60 79.Sel_3PAR Input signal for selecting 3-pole AR mode of corresponding circuit breaker



61 79.Sel_1P/3PAR Input signal for selecting 1/3-pole AR mode of corresponding circuit breaker

62 79.Trp Input signal of single-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR

63 79.Trp3P Input signal of three-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR

64 79.TrpA Input signal of A-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR

65 79.TrpB Input signal of B-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR

66 79.TrpC Input signal of C-phase tripping from line protection to initiate AR

67 79.LockOut

Input signal of blocking reclosing, usually it is connected with the operating

signals of definite-time protection, transformer protection and busbar

differential protection, etc.

68 79.PLC_Lost Input signal of indicating the alarm signal that signal channel is lost

69 79.WaitMaster Input signal of waiting for reclosing permissive signal from master AR (when

reclosing multiple circuit breakers)

70 79.CB_Healthy The input for indicating whether circuit breaker has enough energy to perform

the close function

71 79.Clr_Counter Clear the reclosing counter

72 79.Ok_Chk Synchrocheck condition of AR is met

Trip Logic

73 TrpOut.En Trip enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or programmable logic etc.

74 TrpOut.Blk Trip blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or programmable logic etc.

75 Op_CBProt breaker tripping elements except line fault

76 PrepTrp3P

Input signal of permitting three-phase tripping

When this signal is valid, three-phase tripping will be adopted for any kind of

faults.

VT Circuit Supervision

77 VTS.En VT supervision enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or


78 VTS.Blk VT supervision blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or


79 VTNS.En VT neutral point supervision enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or


80 VTNS.Blk VT neutral point supervision blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or


81 VTS.MCB_VT Binary input for VT MCB auxiliary contact

CT Circuit Supervision

82 CTS.En CT circuit supervision enabling input, it is triggered from binary input or


83 CTS.Blk CT circuit supervision blocking input, it is triggered from binary input or


Control and Synchrocheck for Manual Closing

84 CSWIxx.CILO.EnOpn It is the interlock status of No.xx open output of BO module (xx=01~10)

85 CSWIxx.CILO.EnCls It is the interlock status of No.xx closing output of BO module (xx=01~10)

86 Sig_Ok_Chk From receiving a closing command, this device will continuously check

whether the 2 voltages (Incoming voltage and reference voltage) involved in



synchronism check(or dead check) can meet the criteria.

Within the duration of [MCBrd.25.t_Wait_Chk], if the synchronism check(or

dead check) criteria are not met, [Sig_Ok_Chk] will be set as “0”; if the

synchronism check(or dead check) criteria are met, [Sig_Ok_Chk] will be set

as “1”.

87 CSWIxx.Cmd_LocCtrl

Access the menu “Local Cmd→Control” to issue control command locally.

It is used to select the local control to No.xx controlled object (CB/DS/ES).

When the local control is active, No.xx binary outputs can only be locally

controlled.

88 CSWIxx.Cmd_RmtCtrl

It is used to select the remote control to No.xx controlled object (CB/DS/ES).

When the remote control is active, No.xx binary outputs can only be remotely

controlled by SCADA or control centers.

89 CSWIxx.CILO.Disable

It is used to disable the interlock blocking function for control output. If the

signal “CSWIxx.CILO.Disable” is “1”, No.xx binary outputs of the device will

not be blocked by interlock conditions.

90 BIinput.RmtCtrl

It is used to select the remote control to No.xx controlled object (CB/DS/ES).

When the remote control is active, all binary outputs can only be remotely

controlled by SCADA or control centers.

91 BIinput.LocCtrl

It is used to select the local control to No.xx controlled object (CB/DS/ES).

When the local control is active, all binary outputs can only be locally

controlled.

92 BIinput.CILO.Disable

It is used to disable the interlock blocking function for control output. If the

signal “CSWIxx.CILO.Disable” is “1”, all binary outputs of this device will not

be blocked by interlock conditions.

93 CSWI01.ManSynCls

When the condition of local control is met and the signal

“CSWI01.ManSynCls” is “1”, the output contact [BO_CtrlCls01] is closed to

execute manually closing the circuit breaker with synschrochcek.

94 CSWI01.ManOpn

When the condition of local control is met and the signal “CSWI01.ManOpn” is

“1”, the output contact [BO_CtrlOpn01] is closed to execute manually open the

circuit breaker.

9.4.2 Output Signals

All output signals for this device have been listed in the following table.

If a output signal is gray in PCS-Explorer, it means the output signal is not configurable. If a output

signal is dark in PCS-Explorer, it means the output signal is configurable.

Table 9.4-2 Output signals

No. Signal Description

Circuit Breaker Position

1 Alm_52b CB position is abnormal

Fault Detector

2 FD.Pkp The device picks up

3 FD.DPFC.Pkp DPFC current fault detector element operates.



4 FD.ROC.Pkp Residual current fault detector element operates.

Auxiliary element

5 AuxE.St Any auxiliary element of the device operates

6 AuxE.OCD.St_Ext Current change auxiliary element operates (7s delayed drop off).

7 AuxE.OCD.On Current change auxiliary element is enabled






















29 AuxE.UVD.St Voltage change auxiliary element operates.

30 AuxE.UVD.St_Ext Voltage change auxiliary element operates (7s delayed drop off).

31 AuxE.UVD.On Voltage change auxiliary element is enabled

32 AuxE.UVG.St Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates.

33 AuxE.UVG.StA Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase A).

34 AuxE.UVG.StB Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase B).

35 AuxE.UVG.StC Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase C).

36 AuxE.UVG.On Phase-to-ground under voltage auxiliary element is enabled

37 AuxE.UVS.St Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates.

38 AuxE.UVS.StAB Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase AB).

39 AuxE.UVS.StBC Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase BC).

40 AuxE.UVS.StCA Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element operates (phase CA).

41 AuxE.UVS.On Phase-to-phase under voltage auxiliary element is enabled

42 AuxE.ROV.St Residual voltage auxiliary element operates.

43 AuxE.ROV.On Residual voltage auxiliary element is enabled

Phase Overcurrent Protection

44 50/51Px.En Stage x of phase overcurrent protection is enabled



45 50/51Px.St Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts

46 50/51Px.StA Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts (A-Phase).

47 50/51Px.StB Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts (B-Phase).

48 50/51Px.StC Stage x of phase overcurrent protection starts (C-Phase).

49 50/51Px.Op Stage x of phase overcurrent protection operates

Earth-fault Protection

50 50/51Gx.En Stage x of residual overcurrent protection is enabled.

51 50/51Gx.St Stage x of residual overcurrent protection starts.

52 50/51Gx.Op Stage x of residual overcurrent protection operates.

Dead Zone Protection

53 50DZ.En Dead zone protection is enabled.

54 50DZ.St Dead zone protection starts.

55 50DZ.Op Dead zone protection operates.


56 50BF.En Breaker failure protection is enabled

57 50BF.Op_ReTrpA Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-A circuit breaker

58 50BF.Op_ReTrpB Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-B circuit breaker

59 50BF.Op_ReTrpC Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-C circuit breaker

60 50BF.Op_ReTrp3P Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip three-phase circuit breaker



Pole Discrepancy Protection

63 62PD.En Pole discrepancy protection is enabled

64 62PD.St Pole discrepancy protection starts

65 62PD.Op Pole discrepancy protection operates to trip

Synchronism Check





70 Invalid_Sel Voltage selection is invalid.

71 25.Ok_fDiffChk To indicate that frequency difference condition for synchronism check of AR is

met, frequency difference between UB and UL is smaller than [25.f_Diff].

72 25.Ok_UDiffChk To indicate that voltage difference condition for synchronism check of AR is

met, voltage difference between UB and UL is smaller than [25.U_Diff]

73 25.Ok_phiDiffChk To indicate phase difference condition for synchronism check of AR is met,

phase difference between UB and UL is smaller than [25.phi_Diff].

74 25.Ok_DdL_DdB Dead line and dead bus condition is met

75 25.Ok_DdL_LvB Dead line and live bus condition is met

76 25.Ok_LvL_DdB Live line and dead bus condition is met

77 25.Chk_LvL Line voltage is greater than the voltage setting [25.U_Lv]

78 25.Chk_DdL Line voltage is smaller than the voltage setting [25.U_Dd]

79 25.Chk_LvB Bus voltage is greater than the voltage setting [25.U_Lv]



80 25.Chk_DdB Bus voltage is smaller than the voltage setting [25.U_Dd]

81 25.Ok_DdChk To indicate that dead charge check condition of AR is met

82 25.Ok_SynChk To indicate that synchronism check condition of AR is met

83 25.Ok_Chk To indicate that synchrocheck condition of AR is met

84 25.Alm_VTS_UB Synchronism voltage circuit is abnormal (UB)

85 25.Alm_VTS_UL Synchronism voltage circuit is abnormal (UL)

Auto-reclosure

86 79.On Automatic reclosure is enabled

87 79.Off Automatic reclosure is disabled

88 79.Close Output of auto-reclosing signal

89 79.Ready Automatic reclosure have been ready for reclosing cycle

90 79.AR_Blkd Automatic reclosure is blocked

91 79.Active Automatic reclosing logic is actived

92 79.Inprog Automatic reclosing cycle is in progress

93 79.Inprog_1P The first 1-pole AR cycle is in progress

94 79.Inprog_3P 3-pole AR cycle is in progress

95 79.Inprog_3PS1 First 3-pole AR cycle is in progress

96 79.Inprog_3PS2 Second 3-pole AR cycle is in progress

97 79.Inprog_3PS3 Third 3-pole AR cycle is in progress

98 79.Inprog_3PS4 Fourth 3-pole AR cycle is in progress

99 79.WaitToSlave Waiting signal of automatic reclosing which will be sent to slave (when

reclosing multiple circuit breakers)

100 79.Prem_Trp1P Single-phase circuit breaker will be tripped once protection device operates

101 79.Prem_Trp3P Three-phase circuit breaker will be tripped once protection device operates

102 79.Rcls_Status Automatic reclosure status (0: AR is ready; 1: AR is in progress; 2: AR is

successful)

103 79.Fail_Rcls Auto-reclosing fails

104 79.Succ_Rcls Auto-reclosing is successful

105 79.Fail_Chk Synchrocheck for AR fails



108 79.Mode_1/3PAR Output of 1/3-pole AR mode

Tripping Logic

109 TrpOut.En Trip output is enabled

110 TrpA Tripping phase-A circuit breaker

111 TrpB Tripping phase-B circuit breaker

112 TrpC Tripping phase-C circuit breaker

113 Trp Tripping any phase of circuit breaker

114 Trp3P Tripping three-phase circuit breaker

VT Circuit Supervision

115 VTS.Alm Alarm signal to indicate VT circuit fails

116 VTNS.Alm Alarm signal to indicate VT neutral point fails



CT Circuit Supervision

117 CTS.Alm Alarm signal to indicate CT circuit fails

Control and Synchrocheck for Manual Closing

118 CSWIxx.Op_Opn No.xx command output for open. (xx=01~10)

119 CSWIxx.Op_Cls No.xx command output for closing. (xx=01~10)

120 BIinput.RmtCtrl In order to be convenient to user configure control output, three same output

signals with input signals are available. The relationship with 10 binary output

have been configured inside the device. The user only assigns a specific

binary input to input signal, the relevant function can be gained. If some

binary output need not be controlled by three signals, please cancle the

configuration by PCS-Explorer, and configure it independently.

121 BIinput.LocCtrl

122 BIinput.CILO.Disable

10 Communications


10 Communications

Table of Contents

10.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 10-1

10.2 Rear Communication Port Information ..................................................... 10-1

10.2.1 RS-485 Interface.............................................................................................................. 10-1

10.2.2 Ethernet Interface ............................................................................................................ 10-3

10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication .................................................................................... 10-4

10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port ................................................ 10-4

10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer ............................................................................... 10-4

10.3.2 Initialization ...................................................................................................................... 10-4

10.3.1 Time Synchronization ...................................................................................................... 10-5

10.3.2 Spontaneous Events ........................................................................................................ 10-5

10.3.3 General Interrogation ....................................................................................................... 10-5

10.3.4 General Service ............................................................................................................... 10-5

10.3.5 Disturbance Records ....................................................................................................... 10-6

10.4 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol .......................................... 10-6

10.4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 10-6

10.4.2 Communication Profiles ................................................................................................... 10-7

10.4.3 MMS Communication Network Deployment ................................................................... 10-7

10.4.4 Server Data Organization ............................................................................................... 10-11

10.4.5 Server Features and Configuration ............................................................................... 10-13

10.4.6 ACSI Conformance ........................................................................................................ 10-15

10.4.7 Logical Nodes ................................................................................................................ 10-18

10.5 DNP3.0 Interface........................................................................................ 10-21

10.5.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 10-21

10.5.2 Link Layer Functions ..................................................................................................... 10-21

10.5.3 Transport Functions ....................................................................................................... 10-21

10 Communications


10.5.4 Application Layer Functions .......................................................................................... 10-21

List of Figures

Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements ..................................................... 10-2

Figure 10.2-2 Ethernet communication cable ........................................................................ 10-3

Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication structure .................................................................. 10-3

Figure 10.4-1 Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the RCB block instance ......................... 10-8

Figure 10.4-2 Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance ....................... 10-9

Figure 10.4-3 Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances .................. 10-10

10 Communications


10.1 Overview

This section outlines the remote communications interfaces of NR Relays. The protective device

supports a choice of three protocols via the rear communication interface (RS-485 or Ethernet),

selected via the model number by setting. The protocol provided by the protective device is

indicated in the menu “Settings→Device Setup→Comm Settings”.

The rear EIA RS-485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection of whichever

protocol is selected. The advantage of this type of connection is that up to 32 protective devices

can be “daisy chained” together using a simple twisted pair electrical connection.

It should be noted that the descriptions in this section do not aim to fully introduce the protocol

itself. The relevant documentation for the protocol should be referred for this information. This

section serves to describe the specific implementation of the protocol in the relay.

10.2 Rear Communication Port Information

10.2.1 RS-485 Interface

This protective device provides two rear RS-485 communication ports, and each port has three

terminals in the 12-terminal screw connector located on the back of the relay and each port has a

ground terminal for earth shield of communication cable. The rear ports provide RS-485 serial data

communication and are intended for use with a permanently wired connection to a remote control

center.

10.2.1.1 EIA RS-485 Standardized Bus

The EIA RS-485 two-wire connection provides a half-duplex fully isolated serial connection to the

product. The connection is polarized and whilst the product’s connection diagrams indicate the

polarization of the connection terminals it should be borne in mind that there is no agreed

definition of which terminal is which. If the master is unable to communicate with the product, and

the communication parameters match, then it is possible that the two-wire connection is reversed.

10.2.1.2 Bus Termination

The EIA RS-485 bus must have 120Ω (Ohm) ½ Watt terminating resistors fitted at either end

across the signal wires (refer to Figure 10.2-1). Some devices may be able to provide the bus

terminating resistors by different connection or configuration arrangements, in which case

separate external components will not be required. However, this product does not provide such a

facility, so an external termination resistor is required when it is located at the bus terminus.

10 Communications


Master

Slave Slave Slave

EIA

RS

-48

5

120 Ohm

120 Ohm

Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements

10.2.1.3 Bus Connections & Topologies

The EIA RS-485 standard requires that each device is directly connected to the physical cable i.e.

the communications bus. Stubs and tees are strictly forbidden, such as star topologies. Loop bus

topologies are not part of the EIA RS-485 standard and are forbidden also.

Two-core screened cable is recommended. The specification of the cable will be dependent on the

application, although a multi-strand 0.5mm2 per core is normally adequate. Total cable length must

not exceed 500m. The screen must be continuous and connected to ground at one end, normally

at the master connection point; it is important to avoid circulating currents, especially when the

cable runs between buildings, for both safety and noise reasons.

This product does not provide a signal ground connection. If a signal ground connection is present

in the bus cable then it must be ignored, although it must have continuity for the benefit of other

devices connected to the bus. The signal ground shall not be connected to the cables screen or to

the product’s chassis at any stage. This is for both safety and noise reasons.

10.2.1.4 Biasing

It may also be necessary to bias the signal wires to prevent jabber. Jabber occurs when the signal

level has an indeterminate state due to inactively driven of tubs. This can occur when all the slaves

are in receive mode and the master unit is slow to turn from receive mode to transmit mode. The

reason is that the master purposefully waits in receive mode, or even in a high impedance state,

until it has something to transmit. Jabber can result in the loss of first bits of the first character in

the packet for receiving device(s), which will lead to the rejection of messages for slave units,

causing non-responding between master unit and slave unit. This could brings poor response

times (due to retries), increase in message error counters, erratic communications, and even a

complete failure to communicate.

Biasing requires that the signal lines shall be weakly pulled to a defined voltage level of about 1V.

There should be only one bias point on the bus, which is best situated at the master connection

point. The DC source used for the bias must be clean; otherwise noise will be injected. Please

note that some devices may (optionally) be able to provide the bus bias that the external

components will not be required.

NOTE!

10 Communications


It is extremely important that the 120Ω termination resistors are fitted. Failure to do so will

result in an excessive bias voltage that may damage the devices connected to the bus.

As the field voltage is much higher than that required, NR cannot assume responsibility for

any damage that may occur to a device connected to the network as a result of incorrect

application of this voltage.

Ensure that the field voltage is not being used for other purposes (i.e. powering logic inputs)

as this may cause noise to be passed to the communication network.

10.2.2 Ethernet Interface

This protective device can provide four rear Ethernet interfaces (optional) and they are unattached

to each other. Parameters of each Ethernet port can be configured in the menu

“Settings→Device Setup→Comm Settings”.

10.2.2.1 Ethernet Standardized Communication Cable

It is recommended to use twisted screened eight-core cable as the communication cable. A picture

is shown bellow.

Figure 10.2-2 Ethernet communication cable

10.2.2.2 Connections and Topologies

Each device is connected with an exchanger via communication cable, and thereby it forms a star

structure network. Dual-network is recommended in order to increase reliability. SCADA is also

connected to the exchanger acting as the master station, and every device which has been

connected to the exchanger will act as a slave unit.

……

SCADA

Switch: Net A

Switch: Net B

Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication structure

10 Communications


10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication

The IEC specification IEC60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission

Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards IEC60870-5-1 to IEC60870-5-5 to perform

communication with protective device. The standard configuration of IEC60870-5-103 protocol is

using a twisted pair EIA RS-485 connection over distances up to 500m. It also supports an

Ethernet for communication between devices. The relay operates as a slave unit in the system to

respond commands received from master station.

To use the rear port with IEC60870-5-103 communication, the relevant settings of the protective

device must be configured by using keypad and LCD user interface. In the submenu “Comm

Settings”, set the parameters [Protocol_RS485A], [Protocol_RS485B] and [Baud_RS485]. To use

the Ethernet port with IEC60870-5-103 communication, the IP address and the submask of each

Ethernet port shall be set in the same submenu. Please refer to the corresponding section in

Chapter “Settings” for further details.

10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port

The IEC60870-5-103 interface over serial port (RS-485) is a master/slave interface and the

protective device is the slave device.

The protective device conforms to compatibility level 3.

The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:

Initialization (reset)

Time synchronization

Event record extraction

General interrogation

General commands

Disturbance records

10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer

Two EIA RS-485 standardized ports are available for IEC60870-5-103 in this protective device.

The transmission speed is optional: 4800 bit/s, 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s or 38400 bit/s.

The link layer strictly abides by the rules defined in the IEC60870-5-103.

10.3.2 Initialization

When the protective device is powered up, or the communication parameters are changed, a reset

command is required to initialize the communications. The protective device will respond to either

of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference is that the Reset CU will clear

any unsent messages in the transmit buffer.

The protective device will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5,

10 Communications


the COT (Cause Of Transmission) of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB

depending on the nature of the reset command.

10.3.1 Time Synchronization

The time and date of protective device can be set by time synchronization feature of the

IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The transmission delay as specified in IEC60870-5-103 will be

corrected in the protective device. If the time synchronization message is sent as a send/confirm

message, then the protective device will respond with a confirmation. Whether the

time-synchronization message is sent as a send confirmation or a broadcast (send/no reply)

message, a time synchronization class 1 event will be generated/produced.

If the protective device clock is synchronized using the IRIG-B input, the protection device will not

be able to set the time using the IEC60870-5-103 interface. For attempt to set the time via the

interface, the protective device will create an event with the date and time taken from the IRIG-B

synchronized internal clock.

10.3.2 Spontaneous Events

Events are categorized by the following information:

Type identification (TYP)

Function type (FUN)

Information number (INF)

Messages sent to substation automation system are grouped according to IEC60870-5-103

protocol. Operation elements are sent by ASDU2 (time-tagged message with relative time), and

status of binary signal and alarm element are sent by ASDU1 (time-tagged message). The cause

of transmission (COT) of these responses is 1.

The complete list of all events produced by the protective device can be printed by choosing the

submenu “IEC103 Info” in the menu “Print”.

10.3.3 General Interrogation

The GI can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, and information numbers

that will be returned during the GI cycle. The GI cycle strictly abides by the rules defined in the

IEC60870-5-103.

Refer the IEC60870-5-103 standard can get the enough details about general interrogation.

10.3.4 General Service

The general functions can be used to read the setting and protection measurement of the device,

and modify the setting. Two supported type identifications are ASDU 21 and ASDU 10. For more

details about generic functions, please see the IEC60870-5-103 standard.

Generic service group numbers supported by the relay can be printed by the submenu “IEC103

Info” in the menu “Print”.

10 Communications


10.3.5 Disturbance Records

This protective device can store up to 64 disturbance records in its memory. Pickup of fault

detector or operation of relay will be stored as disturbance recorders in the protective device.

The disturbance records are stored in uncompressed format and can be extracted using the

standard mechanisms described in IEC60870-5-103.

All channel numbers (ACC) of disturbance data can be gained by printing, implementing submenu

“IEC103 Info” in the menu “Print”.

10.4 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol

10.4.1 Overview

The IEC 61850 standard is the result of years of work by electric utilities and vendors of electronic

device to produce standardized communications systems. IEC 61850 is a series of standards

describing client/server and peer-to-peer communications, substation design and configuration,

testing, environmental and project standards. The complete set includes:

IEC 61850-1: Introduction and overview

IEC 61850-2: Glossary

IEC 61850-3: General requirements

IEC 61850-4: System and project management

IEC 61850-5: Communications and requirements for functions and device models

IEC 61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations

related to IEDs

IEC 61850-7-1: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device - Principles

and models

IEC 61850-7-2: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device - Abstract

communication service interface (ACSI)

IEC 61850-7-3: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device – Common

data classes

IEC 61850-7-4: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder device – Compatible

logical node classes and data classes

IEC 61850-8-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Mappings to MMS (ISO

9506-1 and ISO 9506-2) and to ISO/IEC 8802-3

IEC 61850-9-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over

serial unidirectional multidrop point to point link

IEC 61850-9-2: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over

10 Communications


ISO/IEC 8802-3

IEC 61850-10: Conformance testing

These documents can be obtained from the IEC (http://www.iec.ch). It is strongly recommended

that all those involved with any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set.

10.4.2 Communication Profiles

The PCS-900 series relay supports IEC 61850 server services over TCP/IP communication

protocol stacks. The TCP/IP profile requires the PCS-900 series to have an IP address to establish

communications. These addresses are located in the menu “Settings→Device Setup→Comm

Settings”.

1. MMS protocol

IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper

(application) layer for transfer of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for a number

of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN

environment. IEC 61850-7-2 abstract services and objects are mapped to actual MMS protocol

services in IEC61850-8-1.

2. Client/server

This is a connection-oriented type of communication. The connection is initiated by the client, and

communication activity is controlled by the client. IEC61850 clients are often substation computers

running HMI programs or SOE logging software. Servers are usually substation equipment such

as protection relays, meters, RTUs, transformer, tap changers, or bay controllers.

3. Peer-to-peer

This is a non-connection-oriented, high speed type of communication usually between substation

equipment, such as protection relays, intelligent terminal. GOOSE is the method of peer-to-peer

communication.

4. Substation configuration language (SCL)

A substation configuration language is a number of files used to describe IED and communication

system realized according to IEC 61850-5 and IEC 61850-7. Each configured device has an IED

Capability Description (ICD) file and a Configured IED Description (CID) file. The substation single

line information is stored in a System Specification Description (SSD) file. The entire substation

configuration is stored in a Substation Configuration Description (SCD) file. The SCD file is the

combination of the individual ICD files and the SSD file, moreover, add communication system

parameters (MMS, GOOSE, control block, SV control block) and the connection relationship of

GOOSE and SV to SCD file.

10.4.3 MMS Communication Network Deployment

To enhance the stability and reliability of SAS, dual-MMS Ethernet is widely adopted. This section

is applied to introduce the details of dual-MMS Ethernet technology. Generally, single-MMS

dict://key.0895DFE8DB67F9409DB285590D870EDD/network%20deployment

10 Communications


Ethernet is recommended to be adopted in the SAS of 110kV and lower voltage levels, while

dual-MMS Ethernet is recommended to be adopted in the SAS of voltage levels above 110kV.

Client-server mode is adopted: clients (SCADA, control center and etc.) communicate with the

IEDs via MMS communication network, and the IEDs operate as the servers. IEDs are connected

to clients passively, and they can interact with the clients according to the configuration and the

issued command of the clients.

Three modes for dual-MMS Ethernet (abbreviated as dual-net) are provided as below.

NOTE!

Hereinafter, the normal operation status of net means the physical link and TCP link are

both ok. The abnormal operation status of net means physical link or TCP link is broken.

1) Mode 1: Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the same RCB instance

Client

IED (Server)

Report Control Block

Report Instance 1

RptEna = true

Net A Net B

Client

IED (Server)


Report Instance 1

RptEna = true

Net A Net B

TCP Link

MMS Link

Normal operation status Abnormal operation status

Figure 10.4-1 Dual-net full duplex mode sharing the RCB block instance

Net A and Net B share the same report control block (abbreviated as RCB) enabled by the client.

IED sends undifferentiated date through dual-net to the clients. If one net is physically

disconnected, the flag of RCB instance (i.e.: “RptEna” in above figure) is still “true”. Only when

both Net A and Net B are disconnected, the flag of the RCB instance will automatically change to

“false”.

In normal operation status of mode 1, IED provides the same MMS service for Net A and Net B. If

one net is physically disconnected (i.e.: “Abnormal operation status” in above figure), the working

mode will switch to single-net mode seamlessly and immediately. Network communication

supervision is unnecessary here, and Buffered Report Control Block (abbreviated as BRCB) need

10 Communications


not to be used. On the other net, date alternation works normally. Therefore, MMS service can

interact normally without interruption. This mode ensures no data loss during one net is in

abnormal operation status.

In mode 1, one report will be transmitted twice via dual nets for the same report instance, so the

client needs to distinguish whether two reports are same according to corresponding EntryIDs.

2) Mode 2: Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance

Client

IED (Server)


Report Instance 1

RptEna = true

Net A Net B

Client

IED (Server)


Report Instance 1

RptEna = true

Net A Net B

TCP Link

Main MMS Link

Normal operation status Abnormal operation status

Standby MMS Link

Figure 10.4-2 Dual-net hot-standby mode sharing the same RCB instance

In mode 2, the MMS service is provided on main MMS link, no MMS service interacts on the

standby MMS link. The definitions of two links are as follows:

Main MMS Link: Physically connected, TCP level connected, MMS report service available.

Standby MMS Link: Physically connected, TCP level connected, MMS report service not

available.

If the main net fails to operate (i.e.: “Abnormal operation status” in the above figure), the IED will

set “RptEna” to “false”. Meanwhile the client will detect the failure by heartbeat message or

“keep-alive”, it will automatically enable the RCB instance by setting “RptEna” back to “true”

through standby MMS link. By the buffer function of BRCB, the IED can provide uninterrupted

MMS service on the standby net. However, the differences of BRCB standards among different

manufacturers may cause data loss. Moreover, if duration of net switch is too long, the data loss is

positively as the capacity of BRCB’s buffer function is limited.

10 Communications


NOTE!

In mode 1 and mode 2, Net A IED host address and Net B IED host address must be the

same. E.g.: if the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, network prefix of Net A is 198.120.0.0,

network prefix of Net B is 198.121.0.0, Net A IP address of the IED is 198.120.1.2, and

then Net B IP address of the IED must be configured as 198.121.1.2, i.e.: Net A IED host

address =1x256+2=258, Net B IED host address =1x256+2=258, Net A IED host address

equals to Net B IED host address.

3) Mode 3: Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances

Client

IED (Server)


Report Instance 1

RptEna = false

Net A Net B

Report Instance 2

RptEna = true

Client

IED (Server)


Report Instance 1

RptEna = true

Net A Net B

Report Instance 2

RptEna = true

TCP Link

MMS Link

Figure 10.4-3 Dual-net full duplex mode with 2 independent RCB instances

In mode 3, IED provides 2 report instances for each RCB, Net A and Net B work independently

from each other, failures of one net will not affect the other net at all.

In this mode, 2 report instances are required for each client. Therefore, the IED may be unable to

provide enough report instances if there are too many clients.

Net A and Net B send the same report separately when they operates normally, To ensure no

repeated data is saved into database, massive calculation is required for the client.

Moreover, accurate clock synchronization of the IED is required to distinguish whether 2 reports

are the same report according to the timestamps. Clock synchronization error of the IED may lead

to report loss/redundancy.

As a conclusion:

In mode 2, it’s difficult to realize seamless switchover between dual nets;

10 Communications


In mode 3, the IED may be unable to provide enough report instances if too many clients are

applied on site.

For the consideration of client treatment and IED implementation, mode 1 (Dual-net full duplex

mode sharing the same report instance) is recommended for MMS communication network

deployment.

10.4.4 Server Data Organization

IEC61850 defines an object-oriented approach to data and services. An IEC61850 physical device

can contain one or more logical device(s) (for proxy). Each logical device can contain many logical

nodes. Each logical node can contain many data objects. Each data object is composed of data

attributes and data attribute components. Services are available at each level for performing

various functions, such as reading, writing, control commands, and reporting.

Each IED represents one IEC61850 physical device. The physical device contains one or more

logical device(s), and the logical device contains many logical nodes. The logical node LPHD

contains information about the IED physical device. The logical node LLN0 contains common

information about the IED logical device.

10.4.4.1 Digital Status Values

The GGIO logical node is available in the PCS-900 series relays to provide access to digital status

points (including general I/O inputs and warnings) and associated timestamps and quality flags.

The data content must be configured before the data can be used. GGIO provides digital status

points for access by clients. It is intended that clients use GGIO in order to access digital status

values from the PCS-900 series relays. Clients can utilize the IEC61850 buffered reporting

features available from GGIO in order to build sequence of events (SOE) logs and HMI display

screens. Buffered reporting should generally be used for SOE logs since the buffering capability

reduces the chances of missing data state changes. All needed status data objects are transmitted

to HMI clients via buffered reporting, and the corresponding buffered reporting control block

(BRCB) is defined in LLN0.

10.4.4.2 Analog Values

Most of analog measured values are available through the MMXU logical nodes, and metering

values in MMTR, the else in MMXN, MSQI and so on. Each MMXU logical node provides data

from a IED current/voltage “source”. There is one MMXU available for each configurable source.

MMXU1 provides data from CT/VT source 1(usually for protection purpose), and MMXU2 provides

data from CT/VT source 2 (usually for monitor and display purpose). All these analog data objects

are transmitted to HMI clients via unbuffered reporting periodically, and the corresponding

unbuffered reporting control block (URCB) is defined in LLN0. MMXUx logical nodes provide the

following data for each source:

MMXU.MX.Hz: frequency

MMXU.MX.PPV.phsAB: phase AB voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.PPV.phsBC: phase BC voltage magnitude and angle

10 Communications


MMXU.MX.PPV.phsCA: Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.PhV.phsA: phase AG voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.PhV.phsB: phase BG voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.PhV.phsC: phase CG voltage magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.A.phsA: phase A current magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.A.phsB: phase B current magnitude and angle

MMXU.MX.A.phsC: phase C current magnitude and angle

10.4.4.3 Protection Logical Nodes

The following list describes the protection elements for PCS-921 series relays. The specified relay

will contain a subset of protection elements from this list.

PPDP: Pole discrepancy

PTOC: Phase overcurrent, earth fault overcurrent

PSCH: Protection scheme

RBRF:Breaker failure

RREC: Automatic reclosing

RSYN: Synchronism-check

The protection elements listed above contain start (pickup) and operate flags, instead of any

element has its own start (pickup) flag separately, all the elements share a common start (pickup)

flags “PTRC.ST.Str.general”. The operate flag for PTOC1 is “PTOC1.ST.Op.general”. For

PCS-921 series relays protection elements, these flags take their values from related module for

the corresponding element. Similar to digital status values, the protection trip information is

reported via BRCB, and BRCB also locates in LLN0.

10.4.4.4 LLN0 and Other Logical Nodes

Logical node LLN0 is essential for an IEC61850 based IED. This LN shall be used to address

common issues for Logical Devices. Most of the public services, the common settings, control

values and some device oriented data objects are available here. The public services may be

BRCB, URCB and GSE control blocks and similar global defines for the whole device; the

common settings include all the setting items of communication settings. System settings and

some of the protection setting items, which can be configured to two or more protection elements

(logical nodes). In LLN0, the item Loc is a device control object, this Do item indicates the local

operation for complete logical device, when it is true, all the remote control commands to the IED

will be blocked and those commands make effective until the item Loc is changed to false. In

PCS-900 series relays, besides the logical nodes we describe above, there are some other logical

nodes below in the IEDs:

MMXU: This LN shall be used to acquire values from CTs and VTs and calculate measurands

10 Communications


such as r.m.s. values for current and voltage or power flows out of the acquired voltage and

current samples. These values are normally used for operational purposes such as power

flow supervision and management, screen displays, state estimation, etc. The requested

accuracy for these functions has to be provided.

LPHD: Physical device information, the logical node to model common issues for physical

device.

PTRC: Protection trip conditioning, it shall be used to connect the “operate” outputs of one or

more protection functions to a common “trip” to be transmitted to XCBR. In addition or

alternatively, any combination of “operate” outputs of protection functions may be combined to

a new “operate” of PTRC.

RDRE: Disturbance recorder function. It triggers fault wave recorder and its output refers to

the “IEEE Standard Format for Transient Data Exchange (COMTRADE) for Power System”

(IEC 60255-24). All enabled channels are included in the recording and independent of the

trigger mode.

10.4.5 Server Features and Configuration

10.4.5.1 Buffered/unbuffered Reporting

IEC61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting control blocks are located in LLN0, they can be

configured to transmit information of protection trip information (in the Protection logical nodes),

binary status values (in GGIO) and analog measured/calculated values (in MMXU, MMTR and

MSQI). The reporting control blocks can be configured in CID files, and then be sent to the IED via

an IEC61850 client. The following items can be configured.

TrgOps: Trigger options.

The following bits are supported by the PCS-900 series relays:

－ Bit 1: Data-change

－ Bit 4: Integrity

－ Bit 5: General interrogation

OptFlds: Option Fields.

The following bits are supported by the PCS-900 series relays:

－ Bit 1: Sequence-number

－ Bit 2: Report-time-stamp

－ Bit 3: Reason-for-inclusion

－ Bit 4: Data-set-name

－ Bit 5: Data-reference

－ Bit 6: Buffer-overflow (for buffered reports only)

10 Communications


－ Bit 7: EntryID (for buffered reports only)

－ Bit 8: Conf-revision

－ Bit 9: Segmentation

IntgPd: Integrity period.

BufTm: Buffer time.

10.4.5.2 File Transfer

MMS file services are supported to allow transfer of oscillography, event record or other files from

a PCS-900 series relay.

10.4.5.3 Timestamps

The Universal Time Coordinated(UTC for short) timestamp associated with all IEC61850 data

items represents the lastest change time of either the value or quality flags of the data item.

10.4.5.4 Logical Node Name Prefixes

IEC61850 specifies that each logical node can have a name with a total length of 11 characters.

The name is composed of:

A five or six-character name prefix.

A four-character standard name (for example, MMXU, GGIO, PIOC, etc.).

A one or two-character instantiation index.

Complete names are of the form xxxxxxPTOC1, where the xxxxxx character string is configurable.

Details regarding the logical node naming rules are given in IEC61850 parts 6 and 7-2. It is

recommended that a consistent naming convention be used for an entire substation project.

10.4.5.5 GOOSE Services

IEC61850 specifies the type of broadcast data transfer services: Generic Object Oriented

Substation Events (GOOSE). IEC61850 GOOSE services provide virtual LAN (VLAN) support,

Ethernet priority tagging, and Ether-type Application ID configuration. The support for VLANs and

priority tagging allows for the optimization of Ethernet network traffic. GOOSE messages can be

given a higher priority than standard Ethernet traffic, and they can be separated onto specific

VLANs. Devices that transmit GOOSE messages also function as servers. Each GOOSE

publisher contains a “GOOSE control block” to configure and control the transmission.

The GOOSE transmission (including subscribing and publishing) is controlled by GOOSE link

settings in device.

The PCS-900 series relays support IEC61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE)

communication. All GOOSE messages contain IEC61850 data collected into a dataset. It is this

dataset that is transferred using GOOSE message services. The GOOSE related dataset is

configured in the CID file and it is recommended that the fixed GOOSE be used for

implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between PCS-900 series relays.

10 Communications


IEC61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be

correct to achieve the successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the

transmission and reception devices are an exact match in terms of data structure, and that the

GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly.

10.4.6 ACSI Conformance

10.4.6.1 ACSI Basic Conformance Statement

Services Client Server PCS-900 Series

Client-Server Roles

B11 Server side (of Two-party Application-Association) － C1 Y

B12 Client side (of Two-party Application-Association) C1 － N

SCSMS Supported

B21 SCSM: IEC 61850-8-1 used Y Y Y

B22 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-1 used N N N

B23 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-2 used Y N Y

B24 SCSM: other N N N

Generic Substation Event Model (GSE)

B31 Publisher side － O Y

B32 Subscriber side O － Y

Transmission Of Sampled Value Model (SVC)

B41 Publisher side － O N

B42 Subscriber side O － N

Where:

C1: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared

O: Optional

M: Mandatory

Y: Supported by PCS-900 series relays

N: Currently not supported by PCS-900 series relays

10.4.6.2 ACSI Models Conformance Statement

Services Client Server PCS-900 Series

M1 Logical device C2 C2 Y

M2 Logical node C3 C3 Y

M3 Data C4 C4 Y

M4 Data set C5 C5 Y

M5 Substitution O O Y

M6 Setting group control O O Y

Reporting

M7 Buffered report control O O Y

M7-1 sequence-number Y Y Y

10 Communications


M7-2 report-time-stamp Y Y Y

M7-3 reason-for-inclusion Y Y Y

M7-4 data-set-name Y Y Y

M7-5 data-reference Y Y Y

M7-6 buffer-overflow Y Y N

M7-7 entryID Y Y Y

M7-8 BufTm N N N

M7-9 IntgPd Y Y Y

M7-10 GI Y Y Y

M8 Unbuffered report control M M Y

M8-1 sequence-number Y Y Y

M8-2 report-time-stamp Y Y Y

M8-3 reason-for-inclusion Y Y Y

M8-4 data-set-name Y Y Y

M8-5 data-reference Y Y Y

M8-6 BufTm N N N

M8-7 IntgPd N Y Y

Logging

M9 Log control O O N

M9-1 IntgPd N N N

M10 Log O O N

GSE

M12 GOOSE O O Y

M13 GSSE O O N

M14 Multicast SVC O O N

M15 Unicast SVC O O N

M16 Time M M Y

M17 File transfer O O Y

Where:

C2: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared

C3: Shall be "M" if support for DATA model has been declared

C4: Shall be "M" if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time models has

been declared

C5: Shall be "M" if support for Report, GSE, or SMV models has been declared

M: Mandatory

Y: Supported by PCS-900 series relays

N: Currently not supported by PCS-900 series relays

10 Communications


10.4.6.3 ACSI Services Fonformance Statement

Services Server/Publisher PCS-921

Server

S1 ServerDirectory M Y

Application association

S2 Associate M Y

S3 Abort M Y

S4 Release M Y

Logical device

S5 LogicalDeviceDirectory M Y

Logical node

S6 LogicalNodeDirectory M Y

S7 GetAllDataValues M Y

Data

S8 GetDataValues M Y

S9 SetDataValues M Y

S10 GetDataDirectory M Y

S11 GetDataDefinition M Y

Data set

S12 GetDataSetValues M Y

S13 SetDataSetValues O Y

S14 CreateDataSet O N

S15 DeleteDataSet O N

S16 GetDataSetDirectory M Y

Substitution

S17 SetDataValues M Y

Setting group control

S18 SelectActiveSG M/O Y

S19 SelectEditSG M/O Y

S20 SetSGValuess M/O Y

S21 ConfirmEditSGValues M/O Y

S22 GetSGValues M/O Y

S23 GetSGCBValues M/O Y

Reporting

Buffered report control block

S24 Report M Y

S24-1 data-change M Y

S24-2 qchg-change M N

S24-3 data-update M N

S25 GetBRCBValues M Y

S26 SetBRCBValues M Y

Unbuffered report control block

10 Communications


S27 Report M Y

S27-1 data-change M Y

S27-2 qchg-change M N

S27-3 data-update M N

S28 GetURCBValues M Y

S29 SetURCBValues M Y

Logging

Log control block

S30 GetLCBValues O N

S31 SetLCBValues O N

Log

S32 QueryLogByTime O N

S33 QueryLogAfter O N

S34 GetLogStatusValues O N

Generic substation event model (GSE)

GOOSE control block

S35 SendGOOSEMessage M Y

S36 GetGoReference O Y

S37 GetGOOSEElementNumber O N

S38 GetGoCBValues M Y

S39 SetGoCBValuess M N

Control

S51 Select O N

S52 SelectWithValue M Y

S53 Cancel M Y

S54 Operate M Y

S55 Command-Termination O Y

S56 TimeActivated-Operate O N

File transfer

S57 GetFile M/O Y

S58 SetFile O N

S59 DeleteFile O N

S60 GetFileAttributeValues M/O Y

Time

SNTP M Y

10.4.7 Logical Nodes

The PCS-921 series relays support IEC61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table.

Note that the actual instantiation of each logical node is determined by the product order code.

Nodes PCS-921 Series

L: System Logical Nodes

LPHD: Physical device information YES

10 Communications


LLN0: Logical node zero YES

P: Logical Nodes For Protection Functions

PDIF: Differential －

PDIR: Direction comparison －

PDIS: Distance －

PDOP: Directional overpower －

PDUP: Directional underpower －

PFRC: Rate of change of frequency －

PHAR: Harmonic restraint －

PHIZ: Ground detector －

PIOC: Instantaneous overcurrent －

PMRI: Motor restart inhibition －

PMSS: Motor starting time supervision －

POPF: Over power factor －

PPAM: Phase angle measuring －

PSCH: Protection scheme YES

PSDE: Sensitive directional earth fault －

PTEF: Transient earth fault －

PTOC: Time overcurrent YES

PTOF: Overfrequency －

PTOV: Overvoltage －

PTRC: Protection trip conditioning YES

PTTR: Thermal overload －

PTUC: Undercurrent －

PPDP: Pole discrepancy YES

PTUV: Undervoltage －

PUPF: Underpower factor －

PTUF: Underfrequency －

PVOC: Voltage controlled time overcurrent －

PVPH: Volts per Hz －

PZSU: Zero speed or underspeed －

R: Logical Nodes For Protection Related Functions

RDRE: Disturbance recorder function YES

RADR: Disturbance recorder channel analogue －

RBDR: Disturbance recorder channel binary －

RDRS: Disturbance record handling －

RBRF: Breaker failure YES

RDIR: Directional element －

RFLO: Fault locator YES

RPSB: Power swing detection/blocking －

RREC: Autoreclosing YES

RSYN: Synchronism-check or synchronizing YES

10 Communications


C: Logical Nodes For Control

CALH: Alarm handling －

CCGR: Cooling group control －

CILO: Interlocking －

CPOW: Point-on-wave switching －

CSWI: Switch controller －

G: Logical Nodes For Generic References

GAPC: Generic automatic process control YES

GGIO: Generic process I/O YES

GSAL: Generic security application －

I: Logical Nodes For Interfacing And Archiving

IARC: Archiving －

IHMI: Human machine interface －

ITCI: Telecontrol interface －

ITMI: Telemonitoring interface －

A: Logical Nodes For Automatic Control

ANCR: Neutral current regulator －

ARCO: Reactive power control －

ATCC: Automatic tap changer controller －

AVCO: Voltage control －

M: Logical Nodes For Metering And Measurement

MDIF: Differential measurements －

MHAI: Harmonics or interharmonics －

MHAN: Non phase related harmonics or interharmonic －

MMTR: Metering －

MMXN: Non phase related measurement －

MMXU: Measurement YES

MSQI: Sequence and imbalance －

MSTA: Metering statistics －

S: Logical Nodes For Sensors And Monitoring

SARC: Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs －

SIMG: Insulation medium supervision (gas) －

SIML: Insulation medium supervision (liquid) －

SPDC: Monitoring and diagnostics for partial discharges －

X: Logical Nodes For Switchgear

TCTR: Current transformer YES

TVTR: Voltage transformer YES

Y: Logical Nodes For Power Transformers

YEFN: Earth fault neutralizer (Peterson coil) －

YLTC: Tap changer －

YPSH: Power shunt －

YPTR: Power transformer －

10 Communications


Z: Logical Nodes For Further Power System Equipment

ZAXN: Auxiliary network －

ZBAT: Battery －

ZBSH: Bushing －

ZCAB: Power cable －

ZCAP: Capacitor bank －

ZCON: Converter －

ZGEN: Generator －

ZGIL: Gas insulated line －

ZLIN: Power overhead line －

ZMOT: Motor －

ZREA: Reactor －

ZRRC: Rotating reactive component －

ZSAR: Surge arrestor －

ZTCF: Thyristor controlled frequency converter －

ZTRC: Thyristor controlled reactive component －

10.5 DNP3.0 Interface

10.5.1 Overview

The descriptions given here are intended to accompany this relay. The DNP3.0 protocol is not

described here; please refer to the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the DNP3.0

implementation. This manual only specifies which objects, variations and qualifiers are supported

in this relay, and also specifies what data is available from this relay via DNP3.0.

The relay operates as a DNP3.0 slave and supports subset level 2 of the protocol, plus some of

the features from level 3. The DNP3.0 communication uses the Ethernet ports at the rear side of

this relay. The Ethernet ports are optional: electrical or optical.

10.5.2 Link Layer Functions

Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the linker layer functions.

10.5.3 Transport Functions

Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the transport functions.

10.5.4 Application Layer Functions

10.5.4.1 Time Synchronization

1. Time delay measurement

Master/Slave Function Code Object Variation Qualifier

Master 0x17 - - -

Slave 0x81 0x34 0x02 0x07

10 Communications


2. Read time of device


Master 0x01 0x34 0x00, 0x01 0x07-

Slave 0x81 0x32 0x01 0x07

3. Write time of device


Master 0x02 0x32 0x01 0x00, 0x01, 0x07, 0x08

Slave 0x81 - - -

10.5.4.2 Supported Writing Functions

1. Write time of device

See Section 10.5.4.1 for the details.

2. Reset the CU (Reset IIN bit7)


Master 0x02 0x50 0x01 0x00, 0x01

Slave 0x81 - - -

10.5.4.3 Supported Reading Functions

1. Supported qualifiers

Master Qualifier 0x00 0x01 0x06 0x07 0x08

Slave Qualifier 0x00 0x01 0x01 0x07 0x08

2. Supported objects and variations

Object 1, Binary inputs

Master Variation 0x00 0x01 0x02

Slave Variation 0x02 0x01 0x02

The protection operation signals, alarm signals and binary input state change signals are

transported respectively according to the variation sequence in above table.

Object 2, SOE

Master Variation 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03

Slave Variation 0x02 0x01 0x02 0x03

If the master qualifier is “0x07”, the slave responsive qualifier is “0x27”; and if the master

qualifier is “0x01”, “0x06” or “0x08”, the slave responsive qualifier is “0x28”.

Object 30, Analog inputs

Master Variation 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04

Slave Variation 0x01 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04

10 Communications


The measurement values are transported firstly, and then the measurement values are

transported.

Object 40, Analog outputs

Master Variation 0x00 0x01 0x02

Slave Variation 0x01 0x01 0x02

The protection settings are transported in this object.

Object 50, Time Synchronization

See Section 10.5.4.1 for the details.

3. Class 0 data request

The master adopts the “Object 60” for the Class 0 data request and the variation is “0x01”.

The slave responds with the above mentioned “Object 1”, “Object 30” and “Object 40” (see

“Supported objects and variations” in Section 10.5.4.3).

4. Class 1 data request

The master adopts the “Object 60” for the Class 1 data request and the variation is “0x02”.

The slave responds with the above mentioned “Object 2” (see “Supported objects and

variations” in Section 10.5.4.3).

5. Multiple object request

The master adopts the “Object 60” for the multiple object request and the variation is “0x01”,

“0x02”, “0x03” and “0x04”.

The slave responds with the above mentioned “Object 1”, “Object 2”, “Object 30” and “Object

40” (see “Supported objects and variations” in Section 10.5.4.3).

10.5.4.4 Remote Control Functions

The function code 0x03 and 0x04 are supported in this relay. The function code 0x03 is for the

remote control with selection; and the function code 0x04 is for the remote control with execution.

The selection operation must be executed before the execution operation, and the single point

control object can be supported to this relay.

Master Qualifier 0x17 0x27 0x18 0x28

Slave Qualifier 0x17 0x27 0x18 0x28

The “Object 12” is for the remote control functions.

Master Variation 0x01 Control Code

0x01: closing

Slave Variation 0x01 0x10: tripping

10 Communications


11 Installation


11 Installation

Table of Contents

11.1 Overview ....................................................................................................... 11-3

11.2 Safety Information ........................................................................................ 11-3

11.3 Checking Shipment ...................................................................................... 11-4

11.4 Material and Tools Required........................................................................ 11-4

11.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions .................................................. 11-4

11.6 Mechanical Installation ................................................................................ 11-5

11.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring ................................................................ 11-6

11.7.1 Grounding Guidelines ....................................................................................................... 11-6

11.7.2 Cubicle Grounding ............................................................................................................ 11-6

11.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device ................................................................................... 11-7

11.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation .............................................................................. 11-8

11.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring......................................................................................................... 11-8

11.7.6 Wiring for Electrical Cables ............................................................................................... 11-9

List of Figures

Figure 11.6-1 Dimensions of PCS-921 ..................................................................................... 11-5

Figure 11.6-2 panel cut-out of PCS-921 ................................................................................... 11-5

Figure 11.6-3 Demonstration of plugging a board into its corresponding slot .................. 11-6

Figure 11.7-1 Cubicle grounding system ................................................................................ 11-7

Figure 11.7-2 Ground terminal of this relay ............................................................................ 11-8

Figure 11.7-3 Ground strip and termination ........................................................................... 11-8

Figure 11.7-4 Glancing demo about the wiring for electrical cables ................................... 11-9

11 Installation


11 Installation


11.1 Overview

The device must be shipped, stored and installed with the greatest care.

Choose the place of installation such that the communication interface and the controls on the

front of the device are easily accessible.

Air must circulate freely around the equipment. Observe all the requirements regarding place of

installation and ambient conditions given in this instruction manual.

Take care that the external wiring is properly brought into the equipment and terminated correctly

and pay special attention to grounding. Strictly observe the corresponding guidelines contained in

this section.

11.2 Safety Information

Modules and units may only be replaced by correspondingly trained personnel. Always observe

the basic precautions to avoid damage due to electrostatic discharge when handling the

equipment.

In certain cases, the settings have to be configured according to the demands of the engineering

configuration after replacement. It is therefore assumed that the personnel who replace modules

and units are familiar with the use of the operator program on the service PC.

DANGER! Only insert or withdraw the PWR module while the power supply is switched

off. To this end, disconnect the power supply cable that connects with the PWR module.

WARNING! Only insert or withdraw other modules while the power supply is switched off.

WARNING! The modules may only be inserted in the slots designated in Section 6.2.

Components can be damaged or destroyed by inserting boards in the wrong slots.

DANGER! Improper handling of the equipment can cause damage or an incorrect

response of the equipment itself or the primary plant.

WARNING! Industry packs and ribbon cables may only be replaced or the positions of

jumpers be changed on a workbench appropriately designed for working on electronic

equipment. The modules, bus backplanes are sensitive to electrostatic discharge when

not in the unit’s housing.

The basic precautions to guard against electrostatic discharge are as follows:

Should boards have to be removed from this relay installed in a grounded cubicle in an HV

switchgear installation, please discharge yourself by touching station ground (the cubicle)

beforehand.

11 Installation


Only hold electronic boards at the edges, taking care not to touch the components.

Only works on boards that have been removed from the cubicle on a workbench designed for

electronic equipment and wear a grounded wristband. Do not wear a grounded wristband,

however, while inserting or withdrawing units.

Always store and ship the electronic boards in their original packing. Place electronic parts in

electrostatic screened packing materials.

11.3 Checking Shipment

Check that the consignment is complete immediately upon receipt. Notify the nearest NR

Company or agent, should departures from the delivery note, the shipping papers or the order be

found.

Visually inspect all the material when unpacking it. When there is evidence of transport damage,

lodge a claim immediately in writing with the last carrier and notify the nearest NR Company or

agent.

If the equipment is not going to be installed immediately, store all the parts in their original packing

in a clean dry place at a moderate temperature. The humidity at a maximum temperature and the

permissible storage temperature range in dry air are listed in Chapter “Technical Data”.

11.4 Material and Tools Required

The necessary mounting kits will be provided, including screws, pincers and assembly

instructions.

A suitable drill and spanners are required to secure the cubicles to the floor using the plugs

provided (if this relay is mounted in cubicles).

11.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions

The place of installation should permit easy access especially to front of the device, i.e. to the

human machine interface of the equipment.

There should also be free access at the rear of the equipment for additions and replacement of

electronic boards.

Since every piece of technical equipment can be damaged or destroyed by inadmissible ambient

conditions, such as:

1. The location should not be exposed to excessive air pollution (dust, aggressive substances).

2. Severe vibration, extreme changes of temperature, surge voltages of high amplitude and

short rise time, high levels of humidity and strong induced magnetic fields should be avoided

as far as possible.

3. Air must not be allowed to circulate freely around the equipment.

The equipment can in principle be mounted in any attitude, but it is normally mounted vertically

11 Installation


(visibility of markings).

WARNING! Excessively high temperature can appreciably reduce the operating life of

this relay.

11.6 Mechanical Installation

The device adopts IEC standard chassis and is rack with modular structure. It uses an integral

faceplate and plug terminal block on backboard for external connections. PCS-921 series is IEC

4U high and 19” wide. Figure 11.6-1 shows its dimensions and Figure 11.6-2 shows the panel

cut-out.

291

482.6

465.0

10

1.6

17

7.0

Figure 11.6-1 Dimensions of PCS-921

465.0

450.0

17

9.0

10

1.6

4-Ф6.8

Figure 11.6-2 panel cut-out of PCS-921

NOTE! It is necessary to leave enough space top and bottom of the cut-out in the cubicle

for heat emission of this relay.

11 Installation


The safety instructions must be abided by when installing the boards, please see Section 11.2 for

the details.

Following figure shows the installation way of a module being plugged into a corresponding slot.

Figure 11.6-3 Demonstration of plugging a board into its corresponding slot

In the case of equipment supplied in cubicles, place the cubicles on the foundations that have

been prepared. Take care while doing so not to jam or otherwise damage any of the cables that

have already been installed. Secure the cubicles to the foundations.

11.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring

11.7.1 Grounding Guidelines

Switching operations in HV installations generate transient over voltages on control signal cables.

There is also a background of electromagnetic RF fields in electrical installations that can induce

spurious currents in the devices themselves or the leads connected to them.

All these influences can influence the operation of electronic apparatus.

On the other hand, electronic apparatus can transmit interference that can disrupt the operation of

other apparatus.

In order to minimize these influences as far as possible, certain standards have to be observed

with respect to grounding, wiring and screening.

NOTE! All these precautions can only be effective if the station ground is of good quality.

11.7.2 Cubicle Grounding

The cubicle must be designed and fitted out such that the impedance for RF interference of the

ground path from the electronic device to the cubicle ground terminal is as low as possible.

Metal accessories such as side plates, blanking plates etc., must be effectively connected

surface-to-surface to the grounded frame to ensure a low-impedance path to ground for RF

interference. The contact surfaces must not only conduct well, they must also be non-corroding.

NOTE! If the above conditions are not fulfilled, there is a possibility of the cubicle or parts

11 Installation


of it forming a resonant circuit at certain frequencies that would amplify the transmission

of interference by the devices installed and also reduce their immunity to induced

interference.

Movable parts of the cubicle such as doors (front and back) or hinged equipment frames must be

effectively grounded to the frame by three braided copper strips (see Figure 11.7-1).

The metal parts of the cubicle housing and the ground rail are interconnected electrically

conducting and corrosion proof. The contact surfaces shall be as large as possible.

NOTE! For metallic connections please observe the voltage difference of both materials

according to the electrochemical code.

The cubicle ground rail must be effectively connected to the station ground rail by a grounding strip

(braided copper).

Door or hinged

equipment frame

Cubicle ground

rail close to floor

Station

ground

Braided

copper strip

Conducting

connection

Figure 11.7-1 Cubicle grounding system

11.7.3 Ground Connection on the Device

There is a ground terminal on the rear panel, and the ground braided copper strip can be

connected with it. Take care that the grounding strip is always as short as possible. The main thing

is that the device is only grounded at one point. Grounding loops from unit to unit are not allowed.

There are some ground terminals on some connectors of this relay, and the sign is “GND”. All the

ground terminals are connected in the cabinet of this relay. So, the ground terminal on the rear

panel (see Figure 11.7-2) is the only ground terminal of this device.

11 Installation


Figure 11.7-2 Ground terminal of this relay

11.7.4 Grounding Strips and their Installation

High frequency currents are produced by interference in the ground connections and because of

skin effect at these frequencies, only the surface region of the grounding strips is of consequence.

The grounding strips must therefore be of (preferably tinned) braided copper and not round copper

conductors, as the cross-section of round copper would have to be too large.

Proper terminations must be fitted to both ends (press/pinch fit and tinned) with a hole for bolting

them firmly to the items to be connected.

The surfaces to which the grounding strips are bolted must be electrically conducting and

non-corroding.

The following figure shows the ground strip and termination.

Braided

copper strip

Press/pinch fit

cable terminal

Terminal bolt

Contact surface

Figure 11.7-3 Ground strip and termination

11.7.5 Guidelines for Wiring

There are several types of cables that are used in the connection of this relay: braided copper

cable, serial communication cable etc. Recommendation of each cable:

Grounding: braided copper cable, 2.5mm2 ~ 6.0mm

2

Power supply, binary inputs & outputs: brained copper cable, 1.0mm2 ~ 2.5mm

2

AC voltage inputs: brained copper cable, 1.0mm2 ~ 2.5mm

2

AC current inputs: brained copper cable, 1.5mm2 ~ 4.0mm

2

Serial communication: 4-core shielded braided cable

Ethernet communication: 4-pair screened twisted category 5E cable

11 Installation


11.7.6 Wiring for Electrical Cables

A female connector is used for connecting the wires with it, and then a female connector plugs into

a corresponding male connector that is in the front of one board. See Chapter “Hardware” for

further details about the pin defines of these connectors.

The following figure shows the glancing demo about the wiring for the electrical cables.

01 02

03 04

05 06

07

09 10

11 12

13 14

15 16

2423

2221

2019

1817

08

01

Tighten

Figure 11.7-4 Glancing demo about the wiring for electrical cables

DANGER! Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this

equipment to be opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a

dangerously high voltage.

11 Installation


12 Commissioning


12 Commissioning

Table of Contents

12.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 12-1

12.2 Safety Instructions ...................................................................................... 12-1

12.3 Commission Tools ...................................................................................... 12-2

12.4 Setting Familiarization ................................................................................ 12-2

12.5 Product Checks ........................................................................................... 12-3

12.5.1 With the Relay De-energized .......................................................................................... 12-3

12.5.2 With the Relay Energized ................................................................................................ 12-5

12.5.3 Print Fault Report............................................................................................................. 12-7

12.5.4 On-load Checks ............................................................................................................... 12-7

12.6 Final Checks ................................................................................................ 12-8

12 Commissioning


12 Commissioning


12.1 Overview

This relay is fully numerical in their design, implementing all protection and non-protection

functions in software. The relay employs a high degree of self-checking and in the unlikely event of

a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning test does not need to be as

extensive as with non-numeric electronic or electro-mechanical relays.

To commission numerical relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is functioning

correctly and the application-specific software settings have been applied to the relay.

Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided at the end of this manual for

completion as required.

Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of the

safety and technical data sections and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.

12.2 Safety Instructions

WARNING! Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation.

Non-observance of the safety rules can result in severe personal injury or property

damage.

WARNING! Only the qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after

becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this manual as well

as with the applicable safety regulations.

Particular attention must be drawn to the following:

The earthing screw of the device must be connected solidly to the protective earth conductor

before any other electrical connection is made.

Hazardous voltages can be present on all circuits and components connected to the supply

voltage or to the measuring and test quantities.

Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after disconnection of the supply

voltage (storage capacitors!)

The limit values stated in the Chapter “Technical Data” must not be exceeded at all, not even

during testing and commissioning.

When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other

measurement quantities are connected. Take also into consideration that the trip circuits and

maybe also close commands to the circuit breakers and other primary switches are

disconnected from the device unless expressly stated.

DANGER! Current transformer secondary circuits must have been short-circuited before

the current leads to the device are disconnected.

12 Commissioning


WARNING! Primary test may only be carried out by qualified personnel, who are familiar

with the commissioning of protection system, the operation of the plant and safety rules

and regulations (switching, earthing, etc.).

12.3 Commission Tools

Minimum equipment required:

Multifunctional dynamic current and voltage injection test set with interval timer.

Multimeter with suitable AC current range and AC/DC voltage ranges of 0~440V and 0~250V

respectively.

Continuity tester (if not included in the multimeter).

Phase angle meter.

Phase rotation meter.

NOTE! Modern test set may contain many of the above features in one unit.

Optional equipment:

An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a DC output not exceeding 500V (for

insulation resistance test when required).

A portable PC, with appropriate software (this enables the rear communications port to be

tested, if this is to be used, and will also save considerable time during commissioning).

EIA RS-485 to EIA RS-232 converter (if EIA RS-485 IEC60870-5-103 port is being tested).

PCS-900 serials dedicated protection tester HELP-2000.

12.4 Setting Familiarization

When commissioning this device for the first time, sufficient time should be allowed to become

familiar with the method by which the settings are applied. A detailed description of the menu

structure of this relay is contained in Chapter “Operation Theory” and Chapter “Settings”.

With the front cover in place all keys are accessible. All menu cells can be read. The LED

indicators and alarms can be reset. Protection or configuration settings can be changed, or fault

and event records cleared. However, menu cells will require the appropriate password to be

entered before changes can be made.

Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software (such as

PCS-9700 SAS software), the menu can be viewed one page at a time to display a full column of

data and text. This PC software also allows settings to be entered more easily, saved to a file on

disk for future reference or printed to produce a setting record. Refer to the PC software user

manual for details. If the software is being used for the first time, allow sufficient time to become

familiar with its operation.

12 Commissioning


12.5 Product Checks

These product checks cover all aspects of the relay which should be checked to ensure that it has

not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning correctly and all input quantity

measurements are within the stated tolerances.

If the application-specific settings have been applied to the relay prior to commissioning, it is

advisable to make a copy of the settings so as to allow them restoration later. This could be done

by extracting the settings from the relay itself via printer or manually creating a setting record.

12.5.1 With the Relay De-energized

This relay is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored. Commissioning tests can

be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and conjunctive tests. The function

tests are carried out according to user’s correlative regulations.

The following tests are necessary to ensure the normal operation of the equipment before it is first

put into service.

Hardware tests

These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware

defect. Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by

self-monitoring when the DC power is supplied.

User interfaces test

Binary input circuits and output circuits test

AC input circuits test

Function tests

These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based. Tests of

the protection schemes and fault locator require a dynamic test set.

Measuring elements test

Timers test

Measurement and recording test

Conjunctive tests

The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other

external equipment.

On load test.

Phase sequence check and polarity check.

12 Commissioning


12.5.1.1 Visual Inspection

After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the

internal module might also have been affected, contact the vendor. The following items listed is

necessary.

Protection panel

Carefully examine the protection panel, protection equipment inside and other parts inside to

see that no physical damage has occurred since installation.

The rated information of other auxiliary protections should be checked to ensure it is correct

for the particular installation.

Panel wiring

Check the conducting wire which is used in the panel to assure that their cross section

meeting the requirement.

Carefully examine the wiring to see that they are no connection failure exists.

Label

Check all the isolator binary inputs, terminal blocks, indicators, switches and push buttons to

make sure that their labels meet the requirements of this project.

Device plug-in modules

Check each plug-in module of the equipments on the panel to make sure that they are well

installed into the equipment without any screw loosened.

Earthing cable

Check whether the earthing cable from the panel terminal block is safely screwed to the panel

steel sheet.

Switch, keypad, isolator binary inputs and push button

Check whether all the switches, equipment keypad, isolator binary inputs and push buttons

work normally and smoothly.

12.5.1.2 Insulation Test (if required)

Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for them to be

done and they have not been performed during installation.

Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the isolation with an electronic or brushless insulation

tester at a DC voltage not exceeding 500V, The circuits need to be tested should include:

Voltage transformer circuits

Current transformer circuits

DC power supply

12 Commissioning


Optic-isolated control inputs

Output contacts

Communication ports

The insulation resistance should be greater than 100MΩ at 500V.

Test method:

To unplug all the terminals sockets of this relay, and do the Insulation resistance test for each

circuit above with an electronic or brushless insulation tester.

On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected

to the protection.

12.5.1.3 External Wiring

Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant relay diagram and scheme diagram.

Ensure as far as practical that phasing/phase rotation appears to be as expected.

Check the wiring against the schematic diagram for the installation to ensure compliance with the

customer’s normal practice.

12.5.1.4 Auxiliary Power Supply

The relay only can be operated under the auxiliary power supply depending on the relay’s nominal

power supply rating.

The incoming voltage must be within the operating range specified in Chapter “Technical Data”,

before energizing the relay, measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it within the operating range.

Other requirements to the auxiliary power supply are specified in Chapter “Technical Data”. See

this section for further details about the parameters of the power supply.

WARNING! Energize this relay only if the power supply is within the specified operating

ranges in Chapter “Technical Data”.

12.5.2 With the Relay Energized

The following groups of checks verify that the relay hardware and software is functioning correctly

and should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to the relay.

The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from the relay for these

checks. The trip circuit should also remain isolated to prevent accidental operation of the

associated circuit breaker.

12.5.2.1 Front Panel LCD Display

Connect the relay to DC power supply correctly and turn the relay on. Check program version and

forming time displayed in command menu to ensure that are corresponding to what ordered.

12 Commissioning


12.5.2.2 Date and Time

If the time and date is not being maintained by substation automation system, the date and time

should be set manually.

Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using menu item “Clock”.

In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted on CPU board, the time and date will

be maintained. Therefore when the auxiliary supply is restored the time and date will be correct

and not need to set again.

To test this, remove the auxiliary supply from the relay for approximately 30s. After being

re-energized, the time and date should be correct.

12.5.2.3 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

On power up, the green LED “HEALTHY” should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that

the relay is healthy.

The relay has latched signal relays which remember the state of the trip, auto-reclose when the

relay was last energized from an auxiliary supply. Therefore these indicators may also illuminate

when the auxiliary supply is applied. If any of these LEDs are on then they should be reset before

proceeding with further testing. If the LED successfully reset, the LED goes out. There is no testing

required for that that LED because it is known to be operational.

It is likely that alarms related to voltage transformer supervision will not reset at this stage.

12.5.2.4 Testing HEALTHY and ALARM LEDs

Apply the rated DC power supply and check that the “HEALTHY” LED is lighting in green. We

need to emphasize that the “HEALTHY” LED is always lighting in operation course except that the

equipment find serious errors in it.

Produce one of the abnormal conditions listed in Chapter “Supervision”, the “ALARM” LED will

light in yellow. When abnormal condition reset, the “ALARM” LED extinguishes.

12.5.2.5 Testing AC Current Inputs

This test verified that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.

Apply rated current to each current transformer input in turn; checking its magnitude using a

multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays menu.

The measurement accuracy of the protection is 2.5% or 0.02In. However, an additional allowance

must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.

NOTE! The closing circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent

accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker.

12.5.2.6 Testing AC Voltage Inputs

This test verified that the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.

12 Commissioning


Apply rated voltage to each voltage transformer input in turn; checking its magnitude using a

multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays menu.

The measurement accuracy of the relay is 2.5% or 0.1V. However an additional allowance must be

made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.

NOTE! The closing circuit should remain isolated during these checks to prevent

accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker.

12.5.2.7 Testing Binary Inputs

This test checks that all the binary inputs on the equipment are functioning correctly.

The binary inputs should be energized one at a time, see external connection diagrams for

terminal numbers.

Ensure that the voltage applied on the binary input must be within the operating range.

The status of each binary input can be viewed using relay menu. Sign “1” denotes an energized

input and sign “0” denotes a de-energized input.

12.5.3 Print Fault Report

In order to acquire the details of protection operation, it is convenient to print the fault report of

protection device. The printing work can be easily finished when operator presses the print button

on panel of protection device to energize binary input [BI_Print] or operate control menu. What

should be noticed is that only the latest fault report can be printed if operator presses the print

button. A complete fault report includes the content shown as follows.

1) Trip event report

2) Binary input when protection devices start

3) Self-check and the transition of binary input in the process of devices start

4) Fault wave forms compatible with COMTRADE

5) The setting value when the protection device trips

12.5.4 On-load Checks

The objectives of the on-load checks are:

Confirm the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct.

Measure the magnitude of on-load current and voltage (if applicable).

Check the polarity of each current transformer.

However, these checks can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the

tenderization of the plant being protected.

Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring that has

been removed to allow testing.

12 Commissioning


If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to

perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in

accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. Confirm current and voltage

transformer wiring.

12.6 Final Checks

After the above tests are completed, remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been

necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to perform the

wiring verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with

the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.

Ensure that the protection has been restored to service.

If the protection is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has just been maintained, the circuit

breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. If a test block is installed, remove the

test plug and replace the cover so that the protection is put into service.

Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records and alarms have been cleared

and LED’s has been reset before leaving the protection.

13 Maintenance


13 Maintenance

Table of Contents

13.1 Appearance Check ...................................................................................... 13-3

13.2 Failure Tracing And Repair ......................................................................... 13-3

13.3 Replace Failed Modules ............................................................................. 13-3

13.4 Cleaning ....................................................................................................... 13-5

13.5 Storage ......................................................................................................... 13-5

13 Maintenance


13 Maintenance


NR numerical relay PCS-921 is designed to require no special maintenance. All measurement and

signal processing circuit are fully solid state. All input modules are also fully solid state. The output

relays are hermetically sealed.

Since the device is almost completely self-monitored, from the measuring inputs to the output

relays, hardware and software defects are automatically detected and reported. The

self-monitoring ensures the high availability of the device and generally allows for a corrective

rather than preventive maintenance strategy. Therefore, maintenance checks in short intervals are

not required.

Operation of the device is automatically blocked when a hardware failure is detected. If a problem

is detected in the external measuring circuits, the device normally only provides alarm messages.

13.1 Appearance Check

1. The relay case should be clean without any dust stratification. Case cover should be sealed

well. No component has any mechanical damage and distortion, and they should be firmly fixed in

the case. Relay terminals should be in good condition. The keys on the front panel with very good

feeling can be operated flexibly.

2. It is only allowed to plug or withdraw relay board when the supply is reliably switched off.

Never allow the CT secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be opened while the primary

system is live when withdrawing an AC module. Never try to insert or withdraw the relay board

when it is unnecessary.

3. Check weld spots on PCB whether they are well soldered without any rosin joint. All dual

inline components must be well plugged.

13.2 Failure Tracing And Repair

Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.

When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued and the failure is indicated on

the front panel with LED indicators and LCD display. It is also recorded in the event record.

Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the “Superv Events” screen on the LCD.

When a failure is detected during regular testing, confirm the following:

Test circuit connections are correct

Modules are securely inserted in position

Correct DC power voltage is applied

Correct AC inputs are applied

Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual

13.3 Replace Failed Modules

If the failure is identified to be in the relay module and the user has spare modules, the user can

13 Maintenance


recover the protection by replacing the failed modules.

Repair at the site should be limited to module replacement. Maintenance at the component level is

not recommended.

Check that the replacement module has an identical module name (AI, PWR, CPU, SIG, BI, BO,

etc.) and hardware type-form as the removed module. Furthermore, the CPU module replaced

should have the same software version. In addition, the AI and PWR module replaced should have

the same ratings.

The module name is indicated on the top front of the module. The software version is indicated in

LCD menu “Version Info”.

CAUTION!

When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wrist band

and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many of the electronic

components could suffer damage. After replacing the CPU module, check the settings.

1) Replacing a module

Switch off the DC power supply

Disconnect the trip outputs

Short circuit all AC current inputs and disconnect all AC voltage inputs

Unscrew the module.

WARNING!

Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power

supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.

2) Replacing the Human Machine Interface Module (front panel)

Open the relay front panel

Unplug the ribbon cable on the front panel by pushing the catch outside.

Detach the HMI module from the relay

Attach the replacement module in the reverse procedure.

3) Replacing the AI, PWR, CPU, BI or BO module

Unscrew the module connector

Unplug the connector from the target module.

Unscrew the module.

Pull out the module

13 Maintenance


Inset the replacement module in the reverser procedure.

After replacing the CPU module, input the application-specific setting values again.

WARNING!

Units and modules may only be replaced while the supply is switched off and only by

appropriately trained and qualified personnel. Strictly observe the basic precautions to

guard against electrostatic discharge.

WARNING!

When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wrist band

and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many of the electronic

components could suffer damage. After replacing the CPU module, check the settings.

DANGER!

After replacing modules, be sure to check that the same configuration is set as before the

replacement. If this is not the case, there is a danger of the unintended operation of

switchgear taking place or of protections not functioning correctly. Persons may also be

put in danger.

13.4 Cleaning

Before cleaning the relay, ensure that all AC/DC supplies, current transformer connections are

isolated to prevent any chance of an electric shock whilst cleaning. Use a smooth cloth to clean

the front panel. Do not use abrasive material or detergent chemicals.

13.5 Storage

The spare relay or module should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC standard

60255-1 the storage temperature should be from -40oC to +70

oC, but the temperature of from 0

oC

to +40oC is recommended for long-term storage.

13 Maintenance





Table of Contents

14.1 Decommissioning ....................................................................................... 14-3

14.2 Disposal ....................................................................................................... 14-3



14.1 Decommissioning

1. Switching off

To switch off the PCS-921, switch off the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply.

2. Disconnecting Cables

Disconnect the cables in accordance with the rules and recommendations made by relational

department.

DANGER!

Before disconnecting the power supply cables that connected with the PWR module of the

PCS-921, make sure that the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply is

switched off.

DANGER!

Before disconnecting the cables that are used to connect analog input module with the

primary CTs and VTs, make sure that the circuit breaker for the primary CTs and VTs is

switched off.

3. Dismantling

The PCS-921 rack may now be removed from the system cubicle, after which the cubicles may

also be removed.

DANGER!

When the station is in operation, make sure that there is an adequate safety distance to

live parts, especially as dismantling is often performed by unskilled personnel.

14.2 Disposal

In every country there are companies specialized in the proper disposal of electronic waste.

NOTE!

Strictly observe all local and national regulations when disposing of the device.




In the latest version of the instruction manual, several descriptions on existing features have been

modified.

Manual version and modification history records

Manual Version Software

Version Date Description of change

Source New

R1.00 R1.00 2011-11-07 Form the original manual.

R1.00 R1.01

R1.00

and

R1.10

2011-12-29 Chapter 3, Chapter 7 and Chapter 9 are amended

R1.01 R1.02 R2.00 2013-03-01

Modify remote control function

Two system settings are added

Two settings are added for VT circuit supervision module

Add GOOSE alarm signals

Modify logic of reclosing failure and success

Add common alarm signal [Alm_Insuf_Memory]

Modify the breaking capacity of binary output contact

Add symbol corresponding relationship about phase

sequence

Add corresponding description about double circuit

breakers application

PCS-921_X_Instruction Manual_EN_Overseas General_X_R1.02_(EN_FZBH5101.0086.0003).pdf

Documents

Transcript of PCS-921_X_Instruction Manual_EN_Overseas General_X_R1.02_(EN_FZBH5101.0086.0003).pdf